JP2022125237A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a game interest.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: determination means determining whether or not special information satisfies a prescribed condition; game round execution means performing game rounds; and game time setting means setting a game time. The game round execution means is provided with means which performs a first special information game round to be a game round for notifying a player of a result of determination by the determination means with respect to first special information and a second special information game round to be a game round for notifying the player of a result of determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. The game time setting means is provided with means which switches a setting method of a game time of the second special information game round from a first setting method to a second setting method that is different from the first setting method in average value of the set game time as the first special information game round satisfying the prescribed condition is started.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The game time setting means is
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game time of the second special information game round is set as a first setting method. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching from the second setting method to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method.

According to the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing the electric role product open lottery. It is a time chart explaining the point giving production (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X1 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X3 is performed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button pressing effect. It is a time chart explaining the point giving production (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining colors of stages; It is explanatory drawing explaining production|presentation during waiting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in which points are not given; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button pressing effect that are executed in game rounds. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a game cycle setting information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production information setting processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot production scenario table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect scenario table; As an example, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t4 of the production scenario table for big win. It is an explanatory view explaining a point grant scenario table for jackpot/ready-to-win. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision scenario for jackpot and reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a non-reach effect scenario table; As an example, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t24 of the production scenario table for non-reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a non-reach point grant scenario table; It is an explanatory view explaining each point grant scenario for non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set for the game turn to be processed; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point-giving effect effect pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-giving effect effect pattern recorded in a point-giving effect effect pattern table; It is a flow chart which shows point grant production execution processing. 4 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing; 10 is a flowchart showing control processing during point filling. It is a flowchart which shows button press production|presentation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing point reset processing; 9 is a flowchart showing stage display control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production scenario and the point award scenario of the final game round continuous production in the eighth modification of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining modification 9 of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in Modification 10 of the first embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a thirteenth modification of the first embodiment; It is an explanatory view explaining a grant history area. It is an explanatory view explaining a grant history area. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point giving effect in modification 14 of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in a multiplication mode; It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the image of a pearl when a mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point provision production|presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points; It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode which does not display the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point as a display mode of the accumulated point. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how the display mode of accumulated points is changed; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in which the number of points to be given is displayed at the start; It is an explanatory view explaining an example of threshold reaching production. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of carry-over change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a timer time extension production|presentation. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing the electric role product open lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the gaming machine. 4 is a time chart for explaining special bonus processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 1st starting ports. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process of setting the variable time for the first starting opening; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing first fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the decision processing for the 2nd starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for a 2nd starting port. It is a flow chart which shows a low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a high probability high frequency fluctuation|variation time information acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation time information acquisition processing at the time of high probability low frequency. 9 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. 9 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flowchart showing state storage processing; 9 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for game round production|presentation for special 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a process of setting a special 1 effect pattern for the main display area; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game round production|presentation execution process for special 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special 1 fluctuation time measurement processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game round effect processing for special 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a process of setting a special effect pattern for the main display area; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the process of setting the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the game round production|presentation execution process for special 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special 2 fluctuation time measurement processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a special bonus effect setting process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device;

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Applies to other configurations:
D. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 3(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A symbol for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 3B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 3(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 3B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game round display). Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display the pending display corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending game round display).

Further, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the first executed game times display area J1, the second executed game times display area J2, and the stage St are displayed. The first execution game round display region J1 and the second execution game round display region J2 indicate whether the game round to be executed (the game round being executed) is the game round based on the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start game round. It indicates whether the game round is based on the winning to the mouth 34 . A game cycle based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first execution game cycle display region J1, and a game cycle based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed in the second execution game cycle display region J2. be done. Further, when the reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is executed as the game round, the image showing the reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed as the first execution game round. Move to the display area J1. When the reserved game round displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is executed as a game round, the image indicating the reserved game round displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is displayed in the second executed game round display area. Move to J2. Hereinafter, the display shown in the first executed game times display area J1 is also called the first executed game times display, and the display shown in the second executed game times display area J2 is also called the second executed game times display.

The stage St is used for a point giving effect, which will be described later. How the point-giving effect and the stage St are used will be described later in detail.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a includes a main display area MA, a first executed game display area J1, a second executed game display area J2, a stage St, a first synchronization display section Sync1, and a second Although the synchronous display section Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 6(a) shows the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 6(b) shows the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 7(a) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for high-probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 8R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33. ing.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is finished. This is a jackpot in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is ended. This is a jackpot in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary item open lottery.

FIG. 9(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that becomes the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining the point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The point giving effect is an effect of giving points at a predetermined timing during execution of a game round. Then, every time the awarded points accumulate 10 points, the button pressing effect is executed. The button pressing effect is an effect prompting the player to press the effect operation button 24 . Then, when the player presses the performance operation button 24 during the period during which the button-pressing effect is executed, or after the period during which the button-pressing effect is executed, a big win is won in the big winning lottery related to the game round. An effect that suggests the possibility of winning (expectation) is executed. Note that only when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period in which the button-pressing effect is being executed, the effect suggests the possibility (expectation) of winning the big win in the big win lottery related to the game round. may be executed. The point-giving effect (Case 1) will be specifically described below with reference to the time chart.

FIG. 10 shows, as a time chart, the point-giving effect and the button-pressing effect that are executed in one game cycle. In the game cycle shown in FIG. 10, the effect a1 is executed at the same time when the symbol variation is started. By executing the effect a1, an image showing the variation of the liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. In addition, along with the display of these images, audio output and lamp lighting are also executed. After the start of the variation, as shown in the figure, the point giving effect X1 is executed at a predetermined timing. The illustrated [+4P] indicates that 4 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 11(a), an image corresponding to the effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. After that, during execution of the effect a1, the turtle character passes over the display surface 41a from right to left. As shown in FIG. 11(b), at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the images corresponding to the dropped pearls are displayed at the timing when they reach the stage St at the center of the lower part of the display surface 41a. changes to and accumulates. That is, the number of pearls displayed on the stage St corresponds to the accumulated points. At this time, the color of the stage St changes from white to red. The change in color of the stage St will be described later in detail.

The number of points to be awarded in the point awarding effect is first notified to the player at the timing when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a and the image of the pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded is displayed. be. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the number of points to be awarded during the period from when the point giving effect is started until the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a. As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given is not displayed in the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character. By doing so, the player has an expectation for the number of points during the period until the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given is displayed after the dropped pearls reach the stage St. can be given. Also, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, there are cases in which a point giving effect is executed in which points are not given (see FIG. 18). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without dropping pearls, which means giving points. Therefore, when adopting a configuration in which the number of points to be given is not displayed in the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character as in this modification, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a as the first step. At the point of time, the player can be made to recognize that the point giving performance will be executed, and a sense of anticipation can be given. As a second step, when the turtle character drops the pearl, the player can be made to recognize that the executed point giving effect is not a point giving effect in which points are not given. It can give you a sense of expectation. After that, when the pearls dropped by the turtle reach the stage St and the images of the pearls corresponding to the number of points given are displayed, the player who recognizes the number of points given has a sense of anticipation and excitement. It can give a sense of elation. That is, when this modified example is adopted, the timing at which the turtle character appears, the timing at which the turtle character drops a pearl meaning that points are given, and the dropped pearl reaches the stage St and is given. Expectations can be given to the player step by step at three timings when the images of pearls corresponding to the number of points obtained are displayed.

Returning the description to FIG. In FIG. 10, the number of points accumulated by executing the point giving effect is shown as "accumulated points". Since 4 points are accumulated by executing the point giving effect X1 for giving 4 points, <4P> is shown as accumulated points.

After the point giving effect X1 is executed, the point giving effect X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in FIG. 10, 3 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the point giving effect X2, the turtle character passes from right to left above the display surface 41a while the effect a1 is being executed in the same way as in the point giving effect X1. do. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the images corresponding to the dropped pearls are changed to the images of the pearls corresponding to the number of points given at the timing of reaching the stage St and accumulated. By executing the point giving effect X2, 3 points are given, the accumulated points become 7 points, and 7 pearls corresponding to the number of accumulated points are displayed on the stage St.

As shown in FIG. 10, after the point giving effect X2 is executed, the point giving effect X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 5 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the point giving effect X3, similarly to the point giving effect X1 and the point giving effect X2, during the execution of the effect a1, the upper part of the display surface 41a is displayed from the right by the turtle character. pass to the left. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 13(c), the images on the stage St are the image of one shellfish and two images indicating two points at the timing when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches the stage St. will change to the image of pearls. The total accumulated points is 12 points, but since the accumulated points are 10 points or more, in this embodiment, the accumulated points for 10 points are displayed as one shellfish image. A timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is displayed below the image of the shellfish. An effect in which a shellfish and a timer are displayed is also called a timer effect.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer effect and the button pressing effect. FIG. 14(a) shows how the timer effect is executed. As shown in the figure, an image of a shell representing 10 accumulated points is displayed near the stage St. The image of the shell indicates that the button pressing effect will be executed later. A timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is displayed below the image of the shellfish. The timer counts down as time elapses. In addition, of the 12 accumulated points resulting from the execution of the point granting effect X3, the remaining 2 points other than the 10 points corresponding to the 10 pearls that have changed into shells are used as 2 points in the stage St. Displayed as pearls.

Even while the timer effect is being executed, the effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, when the remaining time of the timer indicated by the timer effect becomes 0 (zero), the button pressing effect is executed.

FIG. 14(b) shows how the button pressing effect is executed. The button pressing effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24 . Specifically, an image of an open shell that has been displayed in the timer effect is displayed, and a character saying "Push!" is displayed.

Further, in this example, immediately before the button-pressing effect is started, that is, immediately before the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 due to the timer effect, the liquid crystal pattern variably displayed in the main display area MA is simulated as the effect a1. It will be in a state in which the motor is physically stopped (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-stop state). Then, when the liquid crystal symbols are in the pseudo stop state, the button pressing effect is executed, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the effect a2 is started. , the liquid crystal pattern starts to change again.

In the pseudo-stop state, the liquid crystal symbols are not completely stopped, but slightly fluctuate. The pseudo stop state of the liquid crystal symbols is a display state for allowing the player to perceive the liquid crystal symbols as if they had shifted to the stop display in terms of presentation. In this way, by performing the pseudo stop of the pattern and the start of fluctuation again in one game round, the player is made to recognize as if the advance notice performance is continuously executed across the game rounds. The effect for the purpose is also called a pseudo-continuous advance notice effect in the present embodiment.

That is, in this description, the button-pressing effect is used as a trigger for switching from the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect to the execution of the effect a2. By using the button-pressing effect in this way, the player who temporarily recognizes that he/she has lost the big win lottery by visually recognizing the pseudo-stopped liquid crystal pattern is notified during the execution of the button-pressing effect. By pressing the performance operation button 24 by himself/herself, it is possible to make the player feel as if he/she could temporarily avoid the result of losing the jackpot lottery, and to provide the player with a sense of relief and expectation.

Further, when the point giving effect is executed during execution of the game round, points are given and the points are accumulated. A timer effect is started every time 10 points are accumulated, and a button pressing effect is executed at the timing when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the point giving effect is executed in the game round. Further, when 10 points are accumulated, a button-pressing effect is executed, and the player presses the button at the timing when the button-pressing effect is executed. Since various effects such as a variable effect and an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the game round are executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

After the button-pressing effect is executed, the display of the shell image corresponding to the timer effect and the button effect disappears, and two pearl images indicating the remaining two accumulated points are displayed. becomes.

In spite of the fact that the point giving effect is executed and the points are accumulated, if the game cycle ends without accumulating 10 points or more, the accumulated points are reset (accumulated points: 0). There are cases where it is carried over to the next game round. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of the game cycle is determined by a predetermined process by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The processing will be described later in detail.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the point giving effect in all game times, but executes the point giving effect in some game times. In particular, it is executed at a high frequency in a game round that is a reach ("lost" in a jackpot lottery) or a game round that is a jackpot.

FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining the point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In this description, a case will be described where accumulated points given in the point giving effect are accumulated across game rounds.

As shown in the figure, in the game round U1, a variation is started and an effect b1 is executed. In the effect b1, an image showing the variation of the liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. After that, at a predetermined timing, the point giving effect Y1 is executed. As illustrated, 5 points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulated points are 5 points. After that, the variation of the game round U1 ends. At this time, in the point giving effect (Case 2), when the fluctuation of the game round U1 ends, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round U2 without being reset.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of "color of stage St" in FIG. The color of the stage St is controlled as follows.
(1) If no points have been accumulated, the stage St is set to white.
(2) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over, the stage St is set to yellow.
(3) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, the stage St is set to orange.
The color of the stage St is controlled as described in (1) to (3) above.

As shown in the column of "color of stage St" in FIG. 15, in the case of the point award effect (case 2), the stage St changes from white to yellow when points are accumulated for the first time in the game turn U1. . Thereafter, in the game round U2 as well, the accumulated points are carried over to the game round U3, so that the color of the stage St remains yellow. Then, when the game round U3 is started, the accumulated points are not carried over to the next game round in the game round U3, so the color of the stage St changes from yellow to orange. After that, in the game round U3, since the points are accumulated until the end, the color of the stage St remains orange while the game round U3 is being executed.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the colors of the stage St. FIG. 16(a) shows the stage St when points are not accumulated. The color of the stage St is set to white. FIG. 16(b) shows a stage St in which points are accumulated and accumulated points are carried over. The color of the stage St is set to yellow. FIG. 16(c) shows the stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over. The color of the stage St is set to orange. In this way, the color of the stage St is used to recognizably suggest to the player whether the accumulated points are to be carried over or not.

By suggesting to the player whether the accumulated points are carried over or not, for example, if the color of the stage St is yellow, which indicates that the accumulated points are carried over, the accumulated points are not accumulated in the game round being executed. Even if the accumulated points are not 10 points or more, the accumulated points carried over from the relevant game round and the points granted in the next game round increase the possibility that the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game round. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation by making the player guess.

Returning the description to FIG. When the game round U1 ends and the game round U2 starts, the effect b2 is executed. After that, the point giving effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As illustrated, 6 points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulated points are 11 points. At this time, since the accumulated points have reached 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls is changed to the image of shellfish, but a timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is displayed during the execution of the game round U2. "Waiting" is displayed instead. Hereinafter, the effect in which the characters "waiting" are displayed is also referred to as a waiting effect.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the waiting effect. As shown in the figure, when the waiting effect is executed, the characters "waiting" are displayed below the image of the shellfish. The standby effect indicates that the button pressing effect is not executed in the current game round, and the button pressing effect corresponding to the accumulated points corresponding to the ten points is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds. Then, at the time of shifting to the game cycle in which the button pressing performance corresponding to the accumulated points for 10 points is executed, the timer performance is executed instead of the standby performance, and the button corresponding to the accumulated points for 10 points is pressed. A countdown of the time until the performance is executed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, after the point giving effect Y2 ends, the point giving effect Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. 0 points are given in the point giving effect. In other words, points are not awarded even though the point-giving effect is executed. Therefore, the accumulated points remain at 11 points.

FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in which points are not given. FIG. 18 shows the point giving effect Y3 executed in the game round U2.

When the point-giving effect is started, a turtle character appears from the upper right end of the display surface 41a and advances toward the center in the same way as in the normal point-giving effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(b), even when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does nothing, and as shown in FIG. 18(c), It advances to the left as it is and advances to the upper left end of the display surface 41a. By executing the point giving effect [0P] in this way, it is possible to add an intonation to the player's sense of expectation. After that, the symbols stop and the game round U2 ends. Note that the accumulated points in the game round U2 are set to be carried over to the next game round (game round U3).

When the game round U3 is started, the effect b3 is executed, and the timer effect is executed instead of the waiting effect executed in the game round U2. In FIG. 15, it is written as timer effect 1 in order to distinguish it from another timer effect to be executed later. The timer effect 1 is a effect corresponding to the button pressing effect 1 executed most recently. That is, the time displayed on the timer in the timer effect 1 is the time until the button pressing effect 1 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, the point giving effect Y4 [+3P] and the point giving effect Y5 [+7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after the game round U3 is started. A total of 10 points are given by the two point giving effects. Therefore, the accumulated points are 21 points. As described above, since the button pressing effect is executed once for every 10 accumulated points, the button pressing effect 2 is executed in addition to the button pressing effect 1 in the game round U3. Therefore, when the point giving effect Y5 is executed and 21 accumulated points are accumulated, the timer effect 2 corresponding to the button pressing effect 2 is executed.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer effect and the button pressing effect which are executed in the game round U3. FIG. 19(a) shows how timer effects 1 and 2 are executed. As shown, the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 2 are displayed to the left of the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 1 . As described above, in the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1, the time until the button pressing effect 1 is executed is counted down and displayed. In the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2, the time until the button pressing effect 2 is executed is counted down and displayed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1 and the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2 are different. In this way, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to show the player that the button-pressing effect will be executed twice, and to give the player a greater sense of expectation. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 15, button pressing effect 1 is executed. FIG. 19(b) shows how the button pressing effect 1 is executed. When the button pressing effect 1 is started, the image of the open shell that was displayed in the timer effect 1 is displayed, and the characters "Press!" are displayed. Note that the image corresponding to the timer effect 2 is displayed as it is.

As shown in FIG. 15, after the button pressing effect 1 ends, the effect b4 is executed. Even during execution of the performance b4, the timer performance 2 counts down and displays the time until the button pressing performance 2 is executed. After that, when the countdown time is displayed as 0 in the timer effect 2, the button pressing effect 2 is executed. FIG. 19(c) shows how the button pressing effect 2 is executed. When the button pressing effect 2 is executed, the image of the open shell that was displayed in the timer effect 2 is displayed, and the characters "Press!" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15, after the button pressing effect 2 is executed, the effect b5 is executed, after which the symbols stop and the game round U3 ends. The point giving effect (case 2) has been described above.

In this embodiment, it is set so that the probability of executing the button pressing effect in the game round is higher when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a big win than when it is not a big win. there is

As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the button-pressing effect, the result of the jackpot lottery becomes "big win" or "loss (reaching occurrence)" when the button-pressing effect is executed. A sense of expectation can be given to the player by making the player guess that the probability is high. Further, by executing the point giving performance, the player who recognizes that the button pressing performance will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more is given a sense of expectation each time the point giving performance is executed. can be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset at the end of the game round, or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. The accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game cycle, so that the player desires to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game cycle, and the player's expectations for the point giving performance. The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, when a game round is started, the player who recognizes that the points have been accumulated by executing the point giving effect is conscious of the timing at which the game round ends, in which the accumulated points may be reset. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the manner in which accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which the point-giving effect is executed.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more in the current game round, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, the corresponding game round Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectations for not accumulating 10 points or more.

A4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S10101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10103.

In step S10103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S10104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 26) described later.

In step S10104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the start opening in step S10104 will be described later. After executing step S10104, the process advances to step S10105.

In step S10105, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through prize winning process in step S10105 will be described later. After executing step S10105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. Winning processing for the starting port is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20: S10104).

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S10201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 33 (start win). In step S10201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S10201: YES), the process proceeds to step S10202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S10203.

In step S10203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10209.

In step S10201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start hole 33 (S10201: NO), the process proceeds to step S10205, and whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 34 is determined. 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S10205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S10205: YES), the process proceeds to step S10206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S10207. On the other hand, in step S10205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S10205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S10207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10209.

In step S10209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S10204 or step S10208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S10209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S10209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S10209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S10209: YES), the process proceeds to step S10210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S10211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S10103 (Fig. 20), the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (Fig. 26), It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, ie, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations incremented by 1 in step S10210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S10210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S10210. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (holding information). type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of the game round, etc. are executed before the reservation information becomes a target of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (first determination information ) as a pending command.

The hold command is a judgment result (first judgment information) based on the holding information acquired based on the occurrence of the winning to the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 and the holding information. This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 26 : step S10703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S10214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 21: S10213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the reservation information, determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The reservation information is the main This is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60 .

In step S10301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of judging whether or not a jackpot lottery is successful, judging the type of jackpot, and judging whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S10301, the process proceeds to step S10302.

In step S10302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S10302, the current destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 22: S10301).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S10401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting opening in the winning process for the starting opening (FIG. 21) is read. After that, the process advances to step S10402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery based on this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the winning prior to this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot occurring before the jackpot lottery due to this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big win lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S10402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round, (S10402: YES), the process proceeds to step S10403, and the success/failure table storage area The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S10402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S10402: NO), the process proceeds to step S10404, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S10405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S10405: YES), the process proceeds to step S10406, and is stored in the storage area due to the winning to the start gate this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the flow advances to step S10407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S10407, the process proceeds to step S10408.

In step S10408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S10408, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S10408: YES), the process proceeds to step S10409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S10408, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S10408: NO), the process proceeds to step S10410, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S10405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S10405: NO), the process proceeds to step S10411, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S10412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S10413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S10413: YES), the process proceeds to step S10414, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10413 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S10413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 22: S10302) of the preceding determination process.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S10501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is acquired by the winning to the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 21). After that, the process proceeds to step S10502.

In step S10502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the big win lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process.

In step S10503, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S10503, the process advances to step S10507.

In step S10507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S10502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S10502: NO), the process advances to step S10504 to determine whether reach occurs. When it is determined in step S10504 that reach occurs (S10504: YES), the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S10507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S10504, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S10504: NO), the process proceeds to step S10506, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is stored. By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S10507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the shorter the variable time. there is That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one process of the previous determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The pending number at the time the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is acquired when it is assumed that the first suspended start number RaN=0 (and the second suspended start number RbN=0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by this variable time acquisition process is the actual variable time (variation time) may be different. In the present embodiment, the variation time acquired in the variation time acquisition process executed as one process of the previous determination process is also referred to as "provisional variation time". In the present embodiment, the value of the provisional variation time is used in the processing that is performed when executing the point giving effect. Processing using the temporary fluctuation time will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 20 : step S10105).

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S10601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S10601, if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S10601: YES), the process proceeds to step S10602, whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S10601, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S10601: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

In step S10602, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S10602: YES), the process proceeds to step S10603, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S10604.

In step S10604, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S10602, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S10602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is the upper limit, Winning processing for through is ended without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S10701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S10702.

In step S10702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S10703.

In step S10703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S10702 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S10703, the process advances to step S10704.

In step S10704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10705.

In step S10705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S10706. In step S10706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S10706, the process advances to step S10707.

In step S10707, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10708.

In step S10708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10709.

In step S10709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S10703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S10709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S10709: NO), in steps S10710 and S10711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S10710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S10711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (S10709: YES), the processing returns to step S10703, and each processing from step S10703 to step S10708 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S10703 to step S10708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10706).

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S10801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S10801 that any one of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S10801: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the processing after step S10802 is performed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, when the game is in the special game state, no game round is started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is won. On the other hand, in step S10801, when it determines that it is not in a special game state (S10801:NO), it progresses to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is in the process of changing display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

In step S10802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S10802: NO), the processing proceeds to steps S10803 to S10805 for game round start. In step S10803, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S10803, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S10803: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S10803: NO), the process proceeds to step S10804.

In step S10804, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S10805, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10806.

In step S10806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S10806, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10802 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S10802: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S10807 to S10809 is executed.

In step S10807, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S10807, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 30), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S10807 that the variable time has not elapsed (S10807: NO), the process advances to step S10808 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S10808, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S10807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S10807: YES), the process advances to step S10809 to execute fluctuation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the result display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 29) to be described later is displayed on the result display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S10809, this game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 27: S10804).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be subjected to the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored in chronological order in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 5) information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 5) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S10901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S10901, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S10901: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S10902 to S10907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S10901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S10901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S10908 to S10913 is executed.

In step S10902, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step S10903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S10904. In step S10904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S10905.

In step S10905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S10905, the process advances to step S10906.

In step S10906, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S10907.

In step S10907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S10907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 of the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S10901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S10901: NO), The process advances to step S10908.

In step S10908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S10909. In step S10909, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reserved items CRN, and the process advances to step S10910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S10911.

In step S10911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S10911, the process proceeds to step S10912.

In step S10912, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S10913.

In step S10913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S10913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 of the normal processing (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 27: S10805).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S11001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S11001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S11001:YES), it progresses to step S11002.

In step S11002, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 6(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S11004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S11001: NO), the process proceeds to step S11003.

In step S11003, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 6(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S11004.

In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S11002 or step S11003 is a big hit. In step S11004, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S11004: YES), in steps S11005 to S11012, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S11005: NO), the process advances to step S11006 to refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11005: YES), the flow advances to step S11007 to enter the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step S11006 or step S11007. The process advances to step S11008.

In step S11008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S11006 or step S11007 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S11008, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S11008: YES), the process proceeds to step S11009.

In step S11009, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S11009, the process advances to step S11010.

In step S11010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S11016.

On the other hand, in step S11008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is not a probability variable jackpot (S11008: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S11011.

In step S11011, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S11011, the process proceeds to step S11012.

In step S11012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S11016.

In step S11004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S11002 or step S11003 is not jackpot winning (S11004: NO), the process proceeds to step S11013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not they match.

In step S11013, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S11013: YES), the process proceeds to step S11014.

In step S11014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn that is the stop result for reach. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S11014, the process advances to step S11016.

In step S11013, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S11013: NO), the process proceeds to step S11015.

In step S11015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn that results in a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S11015, the process proceeds to step S11016.

In step S11016, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game turn in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S11016, the process proceeds to step S11017.

In step S11017, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S11017: NO), the process advances to step S11018 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S11016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11017: YES), the process advances to step S11019 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S11016. After executing step S11018 or step S11019, the process proceeds to step S11020.

In step S11020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and off result Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S11018 to S11020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S11020, the process proceeds to step S11021.

In step S11021, of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, the result display section corresponding to the current game cycle is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S11021, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 29: S11016).

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S11101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S11102: YES), the process proceeds to step S11103.

In step S11103, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S11107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S11102, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S11102: NO), the process proceeds to step S11104 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S11104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S11102, in the step S11104, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S11104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S11105. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S11105, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S11107 to set the acquired fluctuating time information in the fluctuating time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S11104, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S11104: NO), the process proceeds to step S11106, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S11107 to set the acquired fluctuating time information in the fluctuating time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 26: S10707).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S11201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S11201: NO), the process advances to step S11202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S11202 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S11202: NO), the process advances to step S11203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S11203, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S11203: NO), the process proceeds to step S11204, timing at which the pattern variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends It is determined whether or not. In step S11204, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S11204: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S11204, if it is determined that it is time to end the variable display (S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S11205: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S11205, if it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S11205: YES), the process proceeds to step S11206 to enter the high probability mode. Turn off the flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S11207.

In step S11207, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S11207, the process advances to step S11208.

In step S11208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S11208, the process advances to step S11209 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is ON (S11203: YES), the process proceeds to step S11210.

In step S11210, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S11210 that the opening period has ended (S11210: YES), the process advances to step S11211 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S11212.

In step S11212, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S11212, the process proceeds to step S11213.

In step S11213, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S11213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or 16R normal flag (S11213: YES), proceed to step S11214, provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, in step S11213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM64 is the 8R probability variable flag or 8R normal flag (S11213: NO), proceed to step S11215, provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S11214 or step S11215, the process proceeds to step S11216.

In step S11216, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S11202, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S11202: YES), the process proceeds to step S11217 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning driving unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S11217, the process advances to step S11218.

In step S11218, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11219: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11218: YES), the flow advances to step S11219 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step S11219, the process advances to step S11220.

In step S11220, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S11220, the process advances to step S11221.

In step S11221, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S11221, the process proceeds to step S11222.

In step S11222, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10603 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S11222, the process proceeds to step S11223.

In step S11223, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is ON (S11201: YES), the process proceeds to step S11224.

In step S11224, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11223), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S11224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S11224: YES), the process proceeds to step S11225.

In step S11225, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11226 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S11226, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S11224, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S11224: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (11217 in FIG. 31) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S11301, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S11301 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S11301: NO), the process proceeds to step S11302 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S11302, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11302: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11302: NO), the process proceeds to step S11303.

In step S11303, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11303: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S11303, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11304, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving section 36c is driven. After that, the process advances to step S11305.

In step S11305, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S11305, the process advances to step S11306.

In step S11306, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 26 : step S10703). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the content of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 is set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S11301, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S11301: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11307: NO), the process proceeds to step S11308.

In step S11308, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11308 that no prize has been won (S11308: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that a prize has been won (S11308: YES), the process advances to step S11309 to subtract 1 from the value of the prize counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11310.

In step S11310, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S11310 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S11310: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11307: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S11310 (S11310: YES), the process proceeds to step S11311 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S11312.

In step S11312, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11313 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S11313, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11313: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11313: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S11314, the process advances to step S11315 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. 26 (step S10703 in FIG. 26), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to correspond to what you have done

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 31: S11226).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S11401, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 has a flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S11401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S11401: YES), the process proceeds to step S11402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S11402, the process advances to step S11403.

In step S11403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S11404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process advances to step S11405.

In step S11405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11406.

In step S11406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S11401: NO), the process advances to step S11407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S11408.

In step S11408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S11409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11410.

In step S11410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10708).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S11501, it is determined whether or not the device is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S11501 that the supported flag is not ON (S11501: NO), the process proceeds to step S11502.

In step S11502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S11502: NO), the process proceeds to step S11503.

In step S11503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S11503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11503: YES), the process proceeds to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S11504 that it is time to end the variable display (S11504: YES), the process advances to step S11505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S11504: NO), the process proceeds to step S11506.

In step S11506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S11506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S11506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S11508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S11507 (S11507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S11508 (S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11509 to perform an electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery Winning (see FIG. 9(b)). Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11510.

In step S11510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S11509 is support winning. In step S11510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S11510: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S11512. On the other hand, in step S11510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S11510: NO), the process proceeds to step S11512 without executing the processing of step S11511.

In step S11512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S11512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S11512: YES), the process proceeds to step S11513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11512 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S11512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S11513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S11513, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S11513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S11514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S11515.

In step S11515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S11515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 26 : step S10703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S11507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S11507: YES), or if it is determined in step S11518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11516, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S11517.

In step S11517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S11516 is support winning. In step S11517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S11517: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S11517, if it is determined that the support is won (S11517: YES), the process advances to step S11518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is ON (S11502: YES), the process advances to step S11519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S11519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11519: YES), the process proceeds to step S11520.

In step S11520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S11521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S11501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S11501: YES), the process advances to step S11522 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 34: S11522).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process. In step S11601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S11601: YES), the process proceeds to step S11602.

In step S11602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S11602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11602: YES), the process proceeds to step S11603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S11603, the process advances to step S11604.

In step S11604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S11605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S11605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S11605: YES), the process advances to step S11606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S11601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S11601: NO), the process proceeds to step S11607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11607: YES), the process advances to step S11608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S11609.

In step S11609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S11609: NO), the process advances to step S11610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S11610 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S11610: YES), the process advances to step S11611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S11609: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S11610 (S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11612. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

A5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

A6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S11701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S11701, the process advances to step S11702.

In step S11702, command handling processing is executed. Command correspondence processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62 . The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S11702, the process advances to step S11703.

In step S11703, point giving effect execution processing is executed. The point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during execution of the game round. The details of the point giving effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S11703, the process advances to step S11704.

In step S11704, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process of step S11702 and the point giving effect execution process of step S4703. After executing step S11704, the process advances to step S11705.

In step S11705, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S11702. After executing step S11705, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 37: S11702).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. In step S11801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S11801 that a hold command has been received (S11801: YES), the process proceeds to step S11802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11801 that no pending command has been received (S11801: NO), the process advances to step S11806.

In step S11802, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S11802 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S11802, the process advances to step S11803.

In step S11803, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 33 specified in step S11802, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 and Based on, the display mode of 1st reservation display area Ds1 and 2nd reservation display area Ds2 is controlled. After executing step S11803, the process advances to step S11804.

In step S11804, the content of the pending command is stored in the game cycle setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information acquired by the first determination processing executed by the main side MPU 62 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 92 by the hold command, and the information of the ahead determination processing included in the transmitted hold command is stored in the game round setting information storage area. 94d.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the game cycle setting information storage area 94d. The game cycle setting information storage area 94d has a first start opening game cycle setting information storage area and a second start opening game cycle setting information storage area. FIG. 39(a) shows the game cycle setting information storage area for the first start opening, and FIG. 39(b) shows the game cycle setting information storage area for the second start opening. Since the configuration of the memory area for game round setting information for the first opening and the memory area for game round setting information for the second opening are the same, the game round setting information for the first opening shown in FIG. The information storage area will be explained, and the explanation of the game turn setting information storage area for the second start opening shown in FIG. 39(b) will be omitted.

As shown, the game cycle setting information storage area for the first starting opening is divided into a first determination information area and an effect information area. Further, each information stored in the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port is stored for each reserved game round. The reserved game times (n=1 to 4) indicated in the game time setting information storage area for the first start opening are from the reserved game times of the first start opening (n=1) to the reserved game times of the first start opening ( n=4), the reserved game times are executed in order.

Information (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as first determination information) is stored. The destination determination information is information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62, and is information transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound and light MPU 92 by the hold command. The sound and light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the first determination information area of the game cycle setting information storage area for the first starting port.

The effect information area of the first starting opening game round setting information storage area is a storage area for storing information set by effect information setting processing described later based on the information stored in the first determination information area. The performance information area will be described later.

In the first determination information area of the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the occurrence of reach, and the provisional fluctuation time are stored for each reserved game round. As described above, the provisional variation time is the holding game round in the case where it is assumed that the first holding holding number RaN=0 and the second holding holding number RbN=0 at the point in time when the holding game round is executed as a game round. is the variation time of

The preceding judgment information stored in the preceding judgment information area and the performance information stored in the performance information area are linked to each reserved game round itself, and each time the game round is executed, the areas to be stored are adjacent to each other. to the storage area for the pending game rounds. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(a), when the game round is executed once, the ahead determination information and effect information stored in the storage area of the pending game round (n=2) are changed to the pending game round ( (n=1) storage area, and the preceding judgment information and performance information stored in the storage area for the pending game round (n=3) are shifted to the storage area for the pending game round (n=2) and are held. The preceding determination information and effect information stored in the storage area for the game round (n=4) are shifted to the storage area for the pending game round (n=3).

Returning the description to FIG. After executing step S11804, the process advances to step S11805. In step S11805, effect information setting processing is executed. The performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area, and setting various items related to the performance to be executed in each game round. Details of the effect information setting process will be described later. After executing step S11805, the process advances to step S11806.

In step S11806, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S11806 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11807.

In step S11807, effect setting processing is executed. The effect setting process is a process of setting the effect to be executed in the game round. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S11807, the process advances to step S11808.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11806 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S11806: NO), the process advances to step S11808 without executing step S11807.

In step S11808, processing for responding to other commands received from main MPU 62 is executed. After executing step S11808, this command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 38: S11802).

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S11901, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. In step S11901, if it is determined that the pending command read this time is based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S11901: YES), the process proceeds to step S11902, sound light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S11902, the process advances to step S11904.

In step S11901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S11901: NO), that is, the pending command is the second start port 34, the process advances to step S11903 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S11903, the process advances to step S11904.

The reason why steps S11902 and S11903 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S11904, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S11904, the update process at the time of the main prize is ended.

<Production information setting process>
Next, the effect information setting process will be described. The effect information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 38: S11805).

As described above, the performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area, and setting various items relating to the performance to be executed in each game round. Various set items are stored in the effect information area of the game round setting information storage area. For convenience of explanation, first, the performance information area (see FIG. 39) of the game round setting information storage area (game round setting information storage area for the first start opening, game round setting information storage area for the second start opening) will be explained. do. After that, the effect information setting process will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the effect information area of the first start gate game cycle setting information storage area includes, for each reserved game cycle, a point grant effect flag, a continuous effect final game cycle flag, and a carryover game cycle flag. , the total number of points to be given, production scenario No., and point giving scenario No. are stored.

The point giving effect flag will be explained. The point giving effect flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the game time for executing the point giving effect.

The continuous effect final game round flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a point-giving effect in which accumulated points are carried over across game rounds and accumulated points are used over a plurality of game rounds. And the last game round of the game rounds in which the continuous production is executed is also referred to as the continuous production final game round. The continuous effect final game round flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the continuous effect final game round.

The carry-over game round flag will be explained. In the present embodiment, the carry-over game round is a game round that is executed before the final game round of the continuous production among the game rounds that execute the continuous production, that is, the game round in which accumulated points are carried over. The carry-over game round flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round is set as the carry-over game round.

Note that the above-mentioned point granting effect flag, continuous effect final game round flag, and carryover game round flag stored in the effect information area are set in the effect setting process described later. After that, it is turned OFF (reset) by updating the game cycle setting information storage area (FIG. 51: S12112).

More specifically, in the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. Since it is used in rounds, the point giving effect is a continuous effect executed over three game rounds. Since the game round U1 and the game round U2 are game rounds in which accumulated points are carried over, they are carried over game rounds. The game round U3 is the last game round of the game rounds in which the continuous production is executed, so it is the final game round of the continuous production. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the continuous effect is executed is referred to as the number of times Np of games performed. In the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 15, Np=3 because the continuous effect is executed using three game rounds. The executed game count Np is used in the process (effect information setting process).

The production scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as production scenario number) will be explained. In the present embodiment, the production scenario refers to various effects related to the production to be executed in the processing target game round, such as the type of animation to be executed in the processing target game round, the timing of executing the animation, the timing of executing the point award production, and the like. It is a program in which the items are set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of production scenarios. The effect scenario number is a code assigned to each effect scenario, and is used to specify one effect scenario.

A point-giving scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as a point-giving scenario number) will be described. In this embodiment, the point-giving scenario is a program in which the number of points to be given in the point-giving effect set for each effect scenario is set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of point giving scenarios. The point giving scenario No. is a code attached corresponding to each point giving scenario, and is used to specify one point giving scenario. The effect information area of the game cycle setting information storage area has been described above.

Next, the effect information setting process will be explained. In the effect information setting process, the effect information stored in the effect information area corresponding to the pending game round to be processed (point grant effect flag, continuous effect final game round flag, carryover game round flag, total number of points to be given , production scenario No., and point-giving scenario No.).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing effect information setting processing. The processing executed in the effect information setting processing is roughly composed of three processing groups.

The processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 is a processing group for setting the effect information of the processing target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurrence)". be.

The processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "missing (reach does not occur)", and when the processing target game round is set as the continuous effect final game round. , a processing group for setting the effect information of the game round to be processed.

The process group of steps S12016 to S12018 is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "out (no reach)", and the game round to be processed has continuity with other game rounds. It is a process group for setting the effect information of the game round to be processed when the point giving effect not executed is executed (when the continuous effect is not executed) or when the point giving effect is not executed.

Details of the effect information setting process will be described below. , Steps S12016 to S12018 will be explained, then Steps S12003 to S12008 will be explained, and finally Steps S12011 to S12015 will be explained.

In step S12001, the information stored in the game cycle setting information storage area is read. When the game round to be processed is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the first start hole is read, and the game round to be processed is the second start hole. If it is based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 34, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the second starting hole is read. After executing step S12001, the process proceeds to step S12002.

In step S12002, based on the information in the first determination information area corresponding to the game round to be processed in the game round setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is "big win" or "loss (reach occurrence)". Determine if there is In step S12002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game cycle to be processed is neither "jackpot" nor "loss (reaching occurrence)", that is, when it is determined to be "loss (reaching non-occurrence)" (S12002: NO), the process proceeds to step S12010.

In step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the reserved game round (preceding reserved game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. By executing the processing, the continuous performance in which the pending game round (advance pending game round) before the processing target game round is set as the carryover game round and the processing target game round is set as the continuous production final game round is performed. Determine whether it is executable. In the present embodiment, when executing a continuous production in which the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "out (no reach)" is set as the final game round of the continuous production, the number of game rounds to execute the continuous production ( Since the execution game number Np) is set to 2, the preceding game round that is the target of determination as to whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag is ON is the preceding holding game that is one before the processing target game round. only times.

When the performance information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed, if it is set not to execute the point giving effect in the preceding suspended game round immediately before the game round to be processed, or the preceding suspended game round When the setting is such that the point giving effect is executed at one time (the continuous effect is not executed), the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round is set to OFF. It should be noted that, at the time when the performance information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed, there is no case where the preceding reserved game round immediately before the game round to be processed is set to the carryover game round in the continuous effect, and the game to be processed There is no case where the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round is set to OFF because the preceding reserved game round is the carry-over game round. The reason is explained below.

At the time of execution of the effect information setting process for the target game round, the effect information for the preceding reserved game round has already been set, but in the present embodiment, the effect information setting process for the target game round is executed. Along with this, there is a case where the effect information of the already set preceding reserved game times is corrected (reset). In the present embodiment, after the continuous effect final game time is set, the preceding reserved game time to be executed prior to the continuous effect final game time is set (reset) as the carryover game time according to the setting. . Therefore, at the time when the effect information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed (that is, at the time when the effect information for the game round to be processed has not yet been set), the preceding reserved game round one before the game round to be processed is It is not set to carry-over game times in continuous production. The case where the effect information of the already set preceding reserved game round is corrected (reset) will be described in detail when describing the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 and the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015.

In step S12010, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the game round to be processed is ON (S12010: YES), the process proceeds to step S12016. That is, the process proceeds to the above-described processing group of steps S12016 to S12018. As described above, in the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018, the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "loss (no reach)", and the game round to be processed is different from other game rounds. This is a processing group for setting the performance information of the game round to be processed when executing a point giving effect without continuity (when not executing a continuous effect) or when not executing a point giving effect. In this embodiment, at the time of setting the effect of the game round to be processed, the setting of the continuous effect final game round is prioritized for the preceding hold game round that has already been set as the continuous effect final game round, and later It is not corrected (reset) to carry-over game times in continuous production. Therefore, in step S12010, when the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the target game round is ON, the processing target game round does not have continuity with the preceding reserved game round. A processing group for setting effects (a processing group of steps S12016 to S12018) is executed.

In step S12016, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed. The point-giving effect in the process is a point-giving effect that is executed in one game round to be processed without continuity with other game rounds. In this embodiment, the lottery in this process is executed using a predetermined random number, and the probability of the lottery result of executing the point giving effect is set to 50%. After executing step S12016, the process proceeds to step S12017.

In step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and when it is determined that the lottery result is to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed (S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018.

In step S12018, the total of points (total given points) to be given in the point giving effect executed in one game to be processed is determined. In this process, the total awarded points is determined by a predetermined lottery, and is set to be between 0 and 9 points. That is, it is set so that 10 points are accumulated and the button-pressing effect is not executed in the game round to be processed. This is to prevent giving unnecessary expectations to the player by executing the button pressing performance in a game cycle in which the result of the jackpot lottery is neither ``jackpot'' nor ``losing (generate reach)''. After executing step S12018, the process proceeds to step S12009.

On the other hand, in step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and when it is determined that the lottery result is that the point giving effect is not executed in the game round to be processed (S12017: NO), step S12018 is not executed. The process advances to step S12009.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12016 to S12018 are recorded in the performance information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined to execute the point giving effect in one game round to be processed, the point giving effect flag is set to ON, the continuous effect final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to the value of the total awarded points determined in step S12018. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are set to NULL. In the present embodiment, only in the game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game round is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. The effect pattern table to be set in the case where the point giving effect is executed in one game to be processed will be described later.

Also, when it is determined not to execute the point giving performance in the game round to be processed, the point giving performance flag is set to OFF, the continuous performance last game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total given points are NULL without being set. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are not set and are NULL.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 will be described. As described above, the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "jackpot" or "missing (occurrence of reach)", the effect information of the game round to be processed. This is the processing group to be set.

As described above, in step S12002, based on the information in the first determination information area corresponding to the processing target game round of the game round setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the processing target game round is "big hit" or "loss ( Reach occurrence)” is determined. Then, in step S12002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game to be processed is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurrence)" (S12002: YES), the process proceeds to step S12003.

In step S12003, the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round before the processing target game round in the game round setting information storage area is read, and the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the processing target game round. Specify the number of preceding pending game times that is. In this process, by specifying the number of the preceding reserved game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned OFF when viewed from the game round to be processed, the preceding reserved game rounds before the game round to be processed are specified. is used as the carry-over game round, and it is determined whether or not the continuous performance using the processing target game round as the continuous performance final game round can be executed. Although the effect information of the preceding reserved game times before the game times to be processed is already set, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect final game time flag is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the game times to be processed. It is determined that the preceding reserved game rounds that are present are game rounds that can be reset as carry-over game rounds. Hereinafter, the number of preceding pending game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned OFF when viewed from the game round to be processed is also referred to as the resettable number of game rounds Fn.

For example, in the case of the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port shown in FIG. ), the continuous effect final game round flags of the suspended game round (n=3) and the suspended game round (n=2), which are consecutive game rounds, are continuously OFF, so in this case, the resettable game The number of times Fn=2. In addition, since the game round setting information storage area for the first start opening shown in FIG. The information in the effect information area of the pending game round (n=4) is not set. That is, the information of the effect information area is set by the effect information setting process.

In addition, if the number of preceding reserved game times in which the continuous effect final game time flag is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the game times to be processed is 0, the number of resettable game times Fn is set to 0. do.

After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

In step S12004, the number of game times that can be used for continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as execution game number Np) is determined based on the resettable game number Fn specified in step S12003. In this embodiment, the number of times Np of games to be executed is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the resettable number of games Fn is the number of games that can be used as the carry-over effect. It becomes the value which added 1 as a game round. Therefore, in step S12004, the number of times Np of executed games, which is equal to or less than Fn+1, is determined by a predetermined lottery. The random number used for the lottery may be obtained when the game ball is entered into the starting hole corresponding to the game round to be processed, or may be obtained when the lottery is executed. When resettable number of games Fn=0, the number of executed games Np is inevitably one. After executing step S12004, the process proceeds to step S12005.

In step S12005, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the game round to be processed. As described above, the production scenario includes various matters related to the production to be executed in the game round to be processed, such as the type of animation to be executed in the game round to be processed, the timing of executing the animation, the timing of executing the point awarding production, etc. is a set program. In this embodiment, the production scenario is determined by referring to the big win production scenario table or the ready-to-win production scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 . When the result of the jackpot lottery of the game to be processed is "jackpot", the production scenario is determined using the jackpot production scenario table, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (reach occurrence), the production scenario for reach. A production scenario is determined using a table.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big win effect scenario table. As shown, in the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time period (provisional variable time period) that can be set for a game turn to be processed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect scenario table. As with the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time period (provisional variable time period) that can be set for a game turn to be processed.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining, as an example, an effect scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t4 of the big win effect scenario table. FIG. 44(a) shows the production scenarios for the big win (production scenario Esc(D1) to production scenario Esc(D4)) corresponding to the temporary fluctuation time T=t4. As shown in the figure, each of the four types of production scenarios is set corresponding to the length of the provisional variable time T=t4, and the type of production to be executed, the point-giving production and the button-pressing production are executed. Timing etc. are different for each. It should be noted that "pseudo-continuous" shown in the figure indicates a pseudo-continuous effect, "Bt" indicates a button-pressing effect, and "Pe" indicates a point-giving effect.

Further, the variation time of the game round differs depending on the number of reserved game rounds at the time when the game round corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending game rounds, the shorter the variation time of the game rounds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending games.

FIG. 44(b) explains that one type of production scenario (production scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of pending games (first start pending number RaN: 0 to 4). It is an explanatory diagram. As shown in the figure, each effect scenario has the same effect moving image to be executed, the number of executions of the point giving effect, etc., but the effect scenario adapted to the case where the number of pending games is large has a shorter execution time. is set to be

In step S12005 (FIG. 41), four kinds of production scenarios corresponding to the provisional fluctuation time of the game round to be processed are specified from the big win production scenario table (or ready-to-win production scenario table), and the specified four production scenarios are specified. One performance scenario is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. Incidentally, the process of selecting one of the five effect scenarios shown in FIG. 44(b) is selected according to the number of reserved game times immediately before the game time corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. After executing step S12005, the process proceeds to step S12006.

In step S12006, a point giving scenario corresponding to the number of times Np of played games is determined based on the determined effect scenario. The point giving scenario is a program in which the number of points to be given in the point giving effect set for each effect scenario is set. In this process, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the jackpot/reach point awarding scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot/ready-to-win point award scenario table. As shown, two point-giving scenarios are set corresponding to each effect scenario and each execution game count Np (1 to 4) determined in step S12004. In this process, two point-giving scenarios are specified based on the determined performance scenario and the number of times Np of games to be played, and one point-giving scenario is selected from the two specified point-giving scenarios by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. decide. Actually, as shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot/ready-to-win point award scenario table, two point award scenarios No. are set corresponding to each execution game number Np. When the point-giving scenario number is determined, the point-giving scenario corresponding to the point-giving scenario number is read from the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot/reach point grant scenario. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of grant points suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the execution order of the point grant performance set in the production scenario, and the number of execution games is set. A total number of points to be given in each preceding game round is set corresponding to Np. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) is executed when the effect scenario set in the game to be processed is Esc (A2) and the number of executed games Np=4. selected. In Psc (A2g), the number of points to be awarded in the processing target game round is set for each point-giving effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, in the game round to be processed, 1 point is given in the first point giving effect, 2 points in the second point giving effect, 3 points in the third point giving effect, and 3 points in the fourth point giving effect. 1 point and 2 points are given in the point giving effect of the fifth time and the point giving effect of the fifth time, respectively.

Also, in each point giving scenario, the total number of points to be given in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game rounds 1 to 3 is set. In addition, in FIG. 46, the game round to be executed immediately before the relevant game round (the game round to be processed) is referred to as the preceding game round 1, and the game round to be executed immediately before the preceding game round 1 It is written as preceding game round 2, and the game round executed one before preceding game round 2 is written as preceding game round 3. In the case of the point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) of FIG. The total given point number in the preceding game round 2 executed immediately before is 4 points, and the total given point number in the preceding game round 3 executed immediately before the preceding game round 2 is 1 point. The timing to execute the point grant effect in each preceding game round 1 to the preceding game round 3 and the number of points to be granted in one point grant effect are determined in the effect setting process described later. Determined based on numbers. After executing step S12006, the process proceeds to step S12007.

In step S12007, it is determined whether or not the number of times Np of executed games determined in step S12004 is 2 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance is executed in which the processing target game time is set to the continuous performance final game time and the preceding game time is set to the carry-over game time. More specifically, when a continuous effect is executed in which the preceding game round is set to the carry-over game round, it is necessary to reset (correct) the effect information of the preceding game round that has already been set. By determining whether or not the number Np of executed games is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not resetting is necessary. In step S12007, when it is determined that the number of times Np of executed games is 2 or more (S12007: YES), the process proceeds to step S12008.

In step S12008, the total given points of each preceding game time stored in the point giving scenario set as the game time to be processed is read. That is, the total given points in the point giving effect executed in each preceding game round are read. After executing step S12008, the process advances to step S12009.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12007 that the number of times Np of executed games is not 2 or more (S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009 without executing step S12008.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S12003 to S12008 are recorded in the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined to execute a continuous effect using the preceding reserved game time before the game time to be processed as the carry-over game time and the game time to be processed as the last game time of the continuous effect, it is used as the carry-over game time. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the preceding game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game time flag is set to ON again. For the total given points, the total given points for each preceding game read in step S12008 are reset. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. The effect pattern table prepared for the effect executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON will be described later.

Then, the point grant effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carried over game time flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to NULL. The total given point is a parameter used to determine the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. There is no need to set the total number of points to be awarded since the grant scenario is already set. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No. corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S12005. The point grant scenario number sets the point grant scenario number corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S12006.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "jackpot" or "loss (reach generation)", the continuous effect final game when the game round executes the continuous effect When it is not set to the number of times, that is, even if the number of times of execution game Np = 1, it is considered that continuous performance of number of times of execution game Np = 1 is executed, and the game time is treated as the last game time of continuous performance. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "big hit" or "missing (occurrence of reach)", the continuous effect final game round flag in the effect information area corresponding to the game round is always turned ON. set. By doing so, when the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big win" or "missing (reach occurrence)" determines the effect information of the game round to be executed after the game round, the carryover game It avoids being reset as times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, accumulated points in game rounds in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big win" or "lost (occurrence of reach)" are not carried over to game rounds to be executed later.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 will be described. As described above, in the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015, the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "loss (no reach)", and the game round to be processed is continuously produced in the final game. It is a processing group for setting the performance information of the game round to be processed when the game round is set.

As described above, in step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the pending game round (advance pending game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. Then, in step S12010, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the target game round is not ON (S12010: NO), the process proceeds to step S12011. That is, it is determined that continuous performance can be executed by setting the reserved game round (preceding reserved game round) immediately before the game round to be processed as the carry-over game round and setting the game round to be processed as the final game round of continuous production. If so, the process advances to step S12011.

It should be noted that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reach does not occur)" when executing a continuous effect in which the game time is set as the final game time of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is performed. The number of games to be played (the number of games to be played Np) is set to 2. This is because the player does not have unnecessary expectations by reducing the number of game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (no reach)". In addition, when the number of game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed reaches three times or more, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery in the last game round of the continuous performance is ``big hit'' or ``loss (occurrence of reach)''. It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of counting the number of times the continuous performance is executed, and increase the expectation of the player as the number of times the continuous performance is executed increases. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous production in which the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (non-reachable)" is set as the final game round of the continuous production, the number of game rounds for executing the continuous production is set. Although the configuration in which the number of times (executed game number Np) is set to 2 is adopted, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which the number of executed games Np is set to 3 or 4 may be adopted.

In step S12011, the game round to be processed is set to the previous reserved game round (advance reserved game round) as the carry-over game round, and the continuous production in which the game round to be processed is set to the continuous production final game round, that is, the execution game. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous performance of the number of times Np=2. In this embodiment, it is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In this embodiment, the setting is made so that the probability of the lottery result that the continuous effect is executed is 20%. In other words, the execution of continuous effects (carrying over of accumulated points) is executed with a high probability when the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurs)", and the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (no reach)". )” is set to be executed with a low probability. By setting in this way, it is possible to impart a strong sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points have been carried over during the execution of the game round. After executing step S12011, the process proceeds to step S12012.

In step S12012, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S12011 that continuous production (Np=2) is executed.

In step S12011, when it determines with not performing continuous production|presentation (Np=2) (S12012:NO), it progresses to step S12016. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "missing (non-reachable)", a point giving effect that does not have continuity with other game rounds in the game round to be processed is executed. Since this is the case where it is possible, the processing by the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 is executed. Since the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S12011, when it determines with performing continuous production|presentation (Np=2) (S12012:YES), it progresses to step S12013.

In step S12013, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the game round to be processed. In this embodiment, an effect scenario is determined by referring to a non-reach effect scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the non-ready effect scenario table. As shown, in the non-reach effect scenario table, two types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time (temporary variable time) that can be set for the game turn to be processed.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, as an example, an effect scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t24 of the non-reach effect scenario table. As shown, each production scenario has a variable time set corresponding to T=t24, and the type of production to be executed, the timing of execution of the point giving production, and the like are different. In addition, no button pressing effect is set in the non-reach effect scenario. That is, the point giving scenario described later is set so that the points given by the point giving effect are not accumulated more than 10 points. In other words, accumulating 10 points or more is limited to cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "missing (occurrence of reach)". By doing so, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation when 10 points or more are accumulated.

Further, similar to the above-described big win production scenario and ready-to-win production scenario, the variation time of the game round differs depending on the number of pending game rounds at the time when the game round corresponding to the production scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending game rounds, the shorter the variation time of the game rounds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending games. After executing step S12013, the process proceeds to step S12014.

In step S12014, a point-giving scenario is determined based on the determined production scenario. In this process, a point grant scenario is determined based on the non-reach point grant scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach point awarding scenario table. As shown, one point-giving scenario is set for each effect scenario. Actually, as shown in FIG. 49, in the non-reach point giving scenario table, one point giving scenario number is set corresponding to each production scenario, and the point giving scenario number of the point giving scenario to be executed is set. A point-giving scenario corresponding to No is read from the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each point awarding scenario for non-reach. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of grant points suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the execution order of the point grant performance set in the production scenario, The total number of points to be given in the preceding game round executed is set.

After executing step S12014, the process proceeds to step S12015.

In step S12015, the total given points of the preceding game times stored in the point giving scenario set as the game time to be processed is read. That is, the total given points in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game round are read. After executing step S12015, the process advances to step S12009.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S12011 to S12015 are recorded in the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. That is, since the preceding reserved game round one before the game round to be processed is used as the carryover game round, and the continuous production using the game round to be processed is used as the continuous production final game round, the preceding game used as the carryover game round is executed. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the time is reset to ON, the continuous effect last game time flag is set to OFF, and the carried over game time flag is set to ON again. For the total given points, the total given points in the preceding game times read in step S12015 are reset. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON.

Then, the point grant effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carried over game time flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to NULL. As described above, the total given point is a parameter used to determine the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. There is no need to set the total points to be given because the production scenario and the point giving scenario are set in advance. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No. corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S12013. The point grant scenario number sets the point grant scenario number corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S12014.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 38: S11807).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing. In step S12101, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed in this process is ON. In step S12101, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12101: YES), the process proceeds to step S12102.

In step S12102, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 39), the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game round to be processed are read. At this time, the effect scenario reads the effect scenario corresponding to the number of pending games during this process (see FIG. 44(b)). After executing step S12102, the process advances to step S12103.

In step S12103, an effect pattern is generated based on the effect scenario set for the game round to be processed and the point giving scenario.

FIG. 52 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game round to be processed. The production scenario records the timing at which each point-giving production is executed and the timing at which the button-pressing production is executed. In the point giving scenario, the number of points to be given for each point giving effect set in the effect scenario is recorded. The sound and light side MPU 92 generates an effect pattern by reading the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game round to be processed, and sets it as the effect pattern for the game round to be processed. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. After executing step S12103, the process advances to step S12107.

On the other hand, in step S12101, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12101: NO), the process proceeds to step S12104.

In step S12104, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed in this process is ON. In step S12104, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12104: YES), the process proceeds to step S12105. That is, when the game round to be processed is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous performance is executed, or when it is set to execute the point giving performance in one of the game rounds to be processed. , the process proceeds to step S12105.

In step S12105, an effect pattern for the game round to be processed is determined based on the variation time of the game round to be processed and the total number of points to be provided. Specifically, the production pattern corresponding to the variable time and the total number of points to be given is specified from the production pattern table for point giving production stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and is set as the production pattern for the game round to be processed. .

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect pattern table for point giving effect. As shown, in the point-giving effect effect pattern table, one effect pattern (point-giving effect effect pattern) is stored corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle and the total given point.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-giving effect effect pattern recorded in the point-giving effect effect pattern table. As shown in the figure, in addition to the timing at which the point giving effect is executed, the number of points to be given in each point giving effect is also set in the effect pattern recorded in the effect pattern table for the point giving effect. In the present embodiment, in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, by generating an effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game round from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, in each point giving effect Although the number of points to be given is set, in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON, as shown in FIG. are provided.

In this way, when the game round to be processed is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous production is executed, or when the game round to be processed is set to execute the point giving effect in one round of the game round to be processed Since the same effect pattern table can be used when there is, the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, when it is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous effect is executed, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, and the point giving effect is set to be executed in one of the game rounds to be processed. However, the display control when the accumulated points are carried over and the display control when the accumulated points are not carried over are determined by setting the carryover game round flag in the point accumulation processing described later. Since it is realized by using, in the case where it is set to the carryover game round in the case where the continuous production is executed, and in the case where it is set to execute the point giving production in one of the game rounds to be processed, The same production pattern can be applied. After executing step S12105 (FIG. 51), the process advances to step S12107.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12104 that the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12104: NO), the process proceeds to step S12106. That is, when the game round to be processed is a game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (non-reachable)" and the point giving effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S12106.

In step S12106, an effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time of the game round to be processed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time is specified from the normal effect effect pattern table stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and is set as the effect pattern for the game round to be processed. One performance pattern is stored in the performance pattern table for normal performance corresponding to each variation time of the game round. After executing step S12016, the process proceeds to step S12107.

In step S12107, the process of setting the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the pattern setting process for the liquid crystal, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable probability jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S12107, the process advances to step S12108.

In step S12108, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S12107 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S12108, the process advances to step S12109.

In step S12109, the effect pattern set in the processes of steps S12103, S12105, and S12106, the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped, and the variable display pattern are set as effect commands, and the process proceeds to step S12110.

In step S12110, the set effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S12111.

In step S12111, a hold information update process is performed. Specifically, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S12111, the process proceeds to step S12112.

In step S12112, update processing of the game round setting information storage area 94d (FIG. 39) is executed. If the game round to be processed is the game round triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting hole 33, the game round setting information stored in the first starting hole game round setting information storage area (first judgment information and effect information) is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game cycle as shown in FIG. 39(a). If the game round to be processed is the game round triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting hole 34, the game round setting information (first determination) stored in the second starting hole game round setting information storage area information and effect information) is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game round as shown in FIG. 39(b). After executing step S12110, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Point giving effect execution processing>
Next, the point giving effect execution processing will be described. As described above, the point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during execution of the game round. The point giving effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: S11703).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the point giving effect execution process. In step S12201, point accumulation processing is executed. The point accumulation process is a process of controlling the start of execution of the point giving effect and the display control for displaying the points given in the point giving effect as a pearl image indicating the accumulated points on the stage St. be. Details of the point accumulation processing will be described later. After executing step S12201, the process proceeds to step S12202.

In step S12202, control processing during point filling is executed. In the point filling time control process, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated (filled), it is determined whether to execute a standby production or a timer production with the filling as a trigger. It is a process of controlling to execute the production. The details of the point filling control process will be described later. After executing step S12202, step S12203 is executed.

In step S12203, button pressing effect processing is executed. The button pressing effect process is a process for controlling the execution of the button pressing effect. The details of the button press effect processing will be described later. After executing step S12203, the process advances to step S12204.

In step S12204, point reset processing is executed. The point reset process is a process of determining whether accumulated points are to be reset or carried over when a game round ends, and controlling execution of resetting of accumulated points. Details of the point reset process will be described later. After executing step S12204, the process advances to step S12205.

In step S12205, stage display control processing is executed. The stage display control process is a process of controlling the color of the stage St. Details of the stage display control processing will be described later. After executing step S12205, this point giving effect execution processing is terminated.

<Point Accumulation Processing>
Next, point accumulation processing will be described. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12201) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing. In step S12301, it is determined whether or not the point giving effect flag is ON. The point giving performance flag is a flag which turns ON when the execution of one point giving performance is started during execution of a game, and turns OFF when the point giving performance ends. In step S12301, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the point giving effect is not started (S12301: NO), the process proceeds to step S12302.

In step S12302, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the point giving effect, based on the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S12302, when it is determined that it is time to start the point giving effect (S12302: YES), the process proceeds to step S12303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12302 that it is not time to start the point giving effect (S12302: NO), this point accumulation process is terminated.

In step S12303, the number of points to be given in the starting point giving effect is read from the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. After executing step S12303, the process advances to step S12304.

In step S12304, a command to start displaying a moving image for point giving effects corresponding to the number of points to be given is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 the effect moving image of the point-giving effect corresponding to the number of points to be given. After executing step S12304, the process advances to step S12305.

In step S12305, output of sound corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image corresponding to the number of points to be given is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image is started. . After executing step S12305, the process advances to step S12306.

In step S12306, the point giving effect execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S12306, this point accumulation processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S12301, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the point giving effect is started (S12301: YES), the process proceeds to step S12307.

In step S12307, it is determined whether or not it is time to complete giving points in the started point giving effect. Specifically, in the point giving effect, after the turtle character drops the pearl indicating the number of points to be given (see FIG. 11), at the timing when the pearl indicating the number of points to be given reaches the stage St. Determine whether or not there is In step S12307, when it is determined that the timing of giving points has not been completed in the started point giving effect (S12307: NO), this point accumulation processing ends. On the other hand, in step S12307, when it is determined that it is time to complete giving points in the started point giving effect (S12307: YES), the process proceeds to step S12308.

In step S12308, the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of assigned points. The accumulation point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of accumulation points. In step S12308, when points are given in the point giving effect, a value corresponding to the number of points given is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing step S12308, the process advances to step S12309.

In step S12309, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 or more. That is, it is determined whether points are given by the point giving effect and the accumulated points are 10 points or more. If it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310.

In step S12310, a point accumulation moving image display start command corresponding to the value of accumulation point counter Cpnt is transmitted to display side MPU . The point accumulation moving image is a moving image in which images of pearls corresponding in number to the accumulated points are displayed on the stage St. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point accumulation moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display an effect moving image in which the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulation point counter Cpnt is displayed on the stage St. After executing step S12310, the process advances to step S12311.

In step S12311, output of sound corresponding to the point accumulation moving image is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point accumulation moving image is started. After executing step S12311, the process proceeds to step S12312.

In step S12312, the point giving effect execution flag is turned OFF. After that, the point accumulation processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 points or more (S12309: YES), the process proceeds to step S12313.

In step S12313, the value of the filled counter Cw is incremented by one. The filled counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time 10 accumulated points are accumulated. After executing step S12313, the process proceeds to step S12314.

In step S12314, 10 is subtracted from the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt. After executing step S12314, the process proceeds to step S12315.

In step S12315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag indicates that, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the process of determining whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the 10 accumulated points has not yet been performed. This flag is turned ON when there is no such flag, and is turned OFF when the determination process is completed. It should be noted that the process of determining whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points corresponding to the ten points is executed in the point charging time control process to be described later. After executing step S12315, the process proceeds to step S12309 again.

That is, the processing of steps S12313 to S12315 is repeated until the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt becomes less than ten. Then, the value of the filled counter Cw is increased by the number of times steps S12313 to S12315 are executed. In other words, when 10 accumulated points are regarded as one accumulated point group, the number of accumulated point groups included in the accumulated points after points are awarded by the point giving effect is counted, and the accumulated point group is counted. is added as a filled counter Cw (S12313), and accumulated points corresponding to the number of accumulated points added to the filled counter Cw are subtracted from the accumulated point counter Cpnt (S12314).

After executing the processing of steps S12313 to S12315, the process proceeds to step S12309 again, and when it is determined that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is less than 10 points (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310. Since the processing after step S12310 has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing during point filling>
Next, the point filling control process will be described. The point charging time control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12202) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing control processing during point filling. In step S12401, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed flag is ON. As described above, the unprocessed flag determines whether, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, a waiting effect is to be executed or a timer effect is to be executed for the 10 accumulated points. This flag is turned ON when the process has not yet been performed, and is turned OFF when the determination process is completed.

If it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S12401: YES), the process proceeds to step S12404. The processing of steps S12404 to S12411 is a process of determining whether to execute the standby production for the accumulated points of 10 points or to execute the timer production, and to control the execution of either production. be. Therefore, when it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that 10 points have been accumulated, the processes of steps S12404 to S12411 are executed to accumulate 10 points. It is determined whether to execute a standby performance or a timer performance for a point, and the execution of any one of the performances is controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), the process proceeds to step S12402.

In step S12402, it is determined whether or not a variation command/type command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new game round. In step S12402, if it is determined that the variation command/type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new game round (S12402: YES), the process proceeds to step S12403.

In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the filled counter Cw=0. If it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12404. That is, if there is one or more accumulated point groups corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 accumulated points, the process advances to step S12404.

Here, if it is determined in step S12402 that a variation command/type command has been received (S12402: YES), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO) , the reason for proceeding to step S12404.

In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing either the waiting effect or the timer effect is not only the timing at which 10 points or more are accumulated, but also the timing at which a new game round is started. At the timing when the game round in which the waiting production is executed is completed and the next new game round is started, and when the new game round is the final game round of continuous production, the waiting production is performed. Instead, a timer effect is executed. 15, the standby performance started in the game round U2, which is the carry-over game round, is switched to the timer performance 1 at the timing when the game round U3, which is the final game round of continuous production, is started.

Therefore, even if it is determined that the unprocessed flag is not ON in step S12401 (S12401: NO), it is determined that it is time to start a new game round by executing step S12402 (S12402: YES), and if it is determined by executing step S12403 that there is one or more accumulation point groups (accumulation points for 10 points) (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12404, and steps S12404 to S12411 By executing the process of 1), it is necessary to determine whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points corresponding to 10 points. Therefore, if it is determined in step S12402 that the variation command/type command has been received (S12402: YES), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO) , the process proceeds to step S12404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12402 that the variation command/type command has not been received (S12402: NO), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw=0 (S12403: YES ), the point filling time control process ends.

In step S12404, it is determined whether or not the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S12404, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12404: YES), the process proceeds to step S12405.

In step S12405, a command to start displaying a moving image for effect during standby corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the standby effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the standby effect moving image corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw on the symbol display device 41 . For example, when the filled counter Cw=1, one image showing the waiting effect (see FIG. 17) is displayed. In the case of the filled counter Cw=2, two images showing the waiting effect are displayed. After executing step S12405, the process advances to step S12406.

In step S12406, output of sound corresponding to the animation for effect during standby is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the animation for effect during standby is started. After executing step S12406, the process advances to step S12411.

In step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling time control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12404 that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12404: NO), the process proceeds to step S12407.

In step S12407, the time until the button effect is executed based on the effect pattern of the game round to be processed is acquired. For example, when one button-press effect is executed in the game round to be processed, the time until the button-press effect is executed is acquired, and two button-press effects are executed in the game round to be processed. , acquires the time until the two button pressing effects are executed. After executing step S12407, the process advances to step S12408.

In step S12408, a command to start displaying moving images for timer effect corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is transmitted to display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the timer effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the pattern display device 41 to display a timer effect moving image corresponding to the remaining time until each button pressing effect. For example, when one button-pressing effect is executed in the game round to be processed, a moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is counted down. When executing two button-pressing effects in the game round to be processed, a moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the first button-pressing effect is executed is counted down, and the second button is displayed. A moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the pressing effect is executed is counted down and displayed (see FIG. 19(a)). After executing step S12408, the process advances to step S12409.

In step S12409, output of sound corresponding to each timer effect moving image is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the timer effect moving image is started. After executing step S12409, the process advances to step S12410.

In step S12410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to zero. After executing step S12410, the process advances to step S12411.

As described above, in step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling time control process is terminated.

<Button pressing effect processing>
Next, the button pressing effect processing will be described. The button pressing effect processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12203) of the point giving effect execution processing.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing button press effect processing. In step S12501, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the button pressing effect, based on the effect pattern set for the game turn to be processed. In step S12501, when it is determined that it is time to start the button pressing effect (S12501: YES), the process proceeds to step S12502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12501 that it is not the time to start the button pressing effect (S12501: NO), this button pressing effect processing ends.

In step S 12502 , a command to start displaying a moving image for button press effect is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the button-pressing effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the button-pressing effect moving image (see FIG. 14B) on the symbol display device 41 . After executing step S12502, the process advances to step S12503.

In step S12503, output of sound corresponding to the moving image for button pressing effect is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the moving image for button pressing effect is started. After executing step S12503, this button pressing effect processing is terminated.

<Point reset processing>
Next, point reset processing will be described. The point reset process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12204) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing point reset processing. In step S12601, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round based on the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S12601, when it is determined that it is time to end the game cycle (S12601: YES), the process proceeds to step S12602.

In step S12602, it is determined whether or not the carry-over game round flag is ON. In step S12602, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag is not ON (S12602: NO), the process proceeds to step S12603.

In step S12603, the accumulation point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt←0). In other words, in the game rounds other than the carry-over game rounds in which accumulated points are carried over, accumulated points are not carried over, so that the accumulated point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulated points in the relevant game round is set to 0 at the end of the relevant game round. After executing step S12603, this point reset process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12601 that it is not the game round end timing (S12601: NO), and if it is determined in step S12602 that the carry-over game round flag is ON (S12602: YES), the accumulation point counter This point resetting process ends without resetting Cpnt.

<Stage display control processing>
Next, stage display control processing will be described. The stage display control process is a process of controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12205) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing stage display control processing. In step S12701, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is zero. If it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 0 (S12701: YES), the process proceeds to step S12702.

In step S12702, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to white is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to white on the pattern display device 41 . In this embodiment, when the points are not accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the game turn to be processed is the carryover game turn or the continuous effect final game turn. After executing step S12702, this stage display control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S12701: NO), the process proceeds to step S12703.

In step S12703, it is determined whether or not the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S12703, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12703: YES), the process proceeds to step S12704.

In step S12704, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow on the pattern display device 41 . As described above, in this embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to yellow when points are accumulated in the carry-over game round. After executing step S12704, this stage display control process ends.

When it is determined in step S12703 that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12705.

In step S12705, a stage moving image display start command with the color of the stage St set to orange is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to orange on the pattern display device 41 . As described above, in this embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to orange when points are accumulated in the final game round of the continuous effect. After executing step S12705, this stage display control process ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S12801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S12802.

In step S12802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S12901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S13001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 62) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S13001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the pattern for the liquid crystal set by the sound emission control device 90, and generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S13002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S13001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S13003.

In step S13003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S13002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S13004.

In step S13004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S13003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S13005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot" or "missing (reaching)", the effect scenario is set so that the button-pressing effect is executed. ing. Therefore, by executing the button-pressing effect, a player who recognizes that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a ``big win'' or a ``loss (occurrence of reach)'' when the button-pressing effect is executed. You can give them a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when execution of a button-pressing effect is set in the effect scenario, by executing the point-giving effect before the button-pressing effect is executed, the accumulated points are increased to 10 points. Points are given as described above. Therefore, by executing the point granting performance, the player who recognizes that the button pressing performance will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more is given a sense of expectation each time the point granting performance is executed. can be granted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset at the end of the game round or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. The accumulated points may be reset at the end of the relevant game cycle, so that the player desires to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game cycle, and the player's expectations for the point giving performance. The feeling can be further increased. Further, a game round is started, and a player who recognizes that points have been accumulated by executing a point giving performance is made aware of the end time of the game round when the accumulated points may be reset, It is possible to draw attention to the mode of accumulating points, that is, the mode of execution of the point-giving effect.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more in the current game round, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, the corresponding game round Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectations for not accumulating 10 points or more.

In this embodiment, the color of the stage St indicates to the player whether or not the accumulated points are carried over. It is possible to impart a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of accumulating points or more, and to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation in game rounds in which 10 points or more are not accumulated.

In this embodiment, a button-pressing effect is used as the processing to be executed when 10 points or more are accumulated. At the timing when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated and the player is given a sense of accomplishment, the player is actively involved in the game by further executing a button-pressing performance to make the player pay more attention to the game, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. can be further increased.

In this embodiment, since the accumulated points are suggested to the player as an image of the pearl on the stage St, the player can always be made aware of the accumulated points.

In this embodiment, since the timer effect is executed, during the period from when the timer effect is executed until when the button pressing effect is executed, the button is continuously executed after the time indicated by the timer effect has elapsed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the pressing effect. In addition, since the remaining time until the button pressing effect is counted down by the timer effect, the suggested remaining time decreases, and as the timing for executing the button pressing effect approaches, the player's sense of expectation can be increased. can.

Also, even if 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the waiting effect may be started and the timer effect may not be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated. By recognizing whether or not it will be executed, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the timing at which the button-pressing effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is executed in the game round in which the button pressing effect is executed. It can give you a feeling.

In the present embodiment, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated and the timer effect is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds, the waiting effect is executed prior to the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, even in the period from the time when 10 accumulated points are accumulated until the timer performance is executed, the execution of the standby performance makes the player aware that the timer performance will be executed in the next game cycle, and the timer performance is made aware of the performance. It is possible to sustain the player's sense of expectation for.

In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute a point giving effect in a predetermined game round, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, whether or not to carry over accumulated points, whether or not to execute a waiting effect, whether or not to execute a timer effect, Each processing content in the relevant game round, such as in which game round the button-pressing effect is to be executed, is determined based on special information of the game round to be executed after the relevant game round (hereinafter also referred to as the subsequent game round). . More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the later game round is "big win" or "missing (reach generation)", continuous production is executed with the latter game round set as the final game round of continuous production. In that case, the game round is set as the carried forward game round. That is, the processing contents of the game round are determined based on the special information of the later game round. By doing so, whether or not to execute the point giving effect, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, whether or not to carry over the accumulated points, whether or not to execute the waiting effect, whether to execute the timer effect, button pressing effect, etc. , can be associated with each other over a plurality of game rounds. By providing a relationship between the processing content of each game round and the processing content of another game round, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in the game round being executed, the predetermined processing and the game round In addition to making the player guess about the relevance to progress, the player is also made to guess about the relevance between the predetermined process and the progress of the subsequent game round. In other words, no matter how the game progresses in the game round being executed, various possibilities are left for the progress of subsequent game rounds, and the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the button-pressing effect is executed in the continuous effect, the more developed the effect executed after each button-pressing effect (the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery suggested by the effect) is increased), the player's expectation for the game can be increased every time the player presses the performance operation button 24 in the button pressing performance. Therefore, even if the execution period of the continuous performance is long, by increasing the number of times of the button pressing performance according to the length of the execution period of the continuous performance, the player's concentration is suppressed and the expectation is further enhanced. can be increased.

A7. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

A7-1. Variant 1:
In 1st Embodiment, when performing a specific production|presentation, you may employ|adopt the structure which always gives a point. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

Specifically, after a predetermined effect (for example, normal reach effect), a case where a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 is executed, and a case in which a point giving effect in which the given points are 0 are executed are set as a production scenario. and set to point award scenario. In this case, a case of executing a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 and a case of executing a point giving effect in which the given points are 0 may be set as one production scenario and a point giving scenario. You may set to another production scenario and point grant scenario. Further, in place of the configuration in which the point imparting effect in which the given point is 0 is executed after the predetermined effect, a configuration in which the point imparting effect is not executed after the predetermined effect may be adopted, or both of them may be adopted. good too.

On the other hand, the production scenario and the point granting scenario are set so that the point granting performance in which the granting points are not 0 is always executed after a specific performance (for example, super ready-to-win performance). As the specific production, a specific ready-to-reach production, a specific cut-in production may be adopted, or a dedicated production for suggesting execution of a point giving production in which the given points are not 0 may be adopted. good.

By doing so, when a specific effect is executed in a game cycle, points are always given in the game cycle, so that the execution of the specific effect is directed to the player who desires to give the points. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the game and to draw attention to the game. In addition, when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to impart an uplifting feeling to the player who desires the award of points, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

For example, when the accumulated points are 9 points, and if one more point is given, the accumulated points become 10 points or more and the button pressing effect is executed, the player responds to the execution of the specific effect. can give a strong sense of expectation to Also, in such a situation, when a specific effect is executed and points are awarded, a strong sense of accomplishment can be imparted to the player.

A7-2. Modification 2:
In the first embodiment, when accumulated points in a game round being executed are carried over to the next game round, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always awarded in a game round after the current game round. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

Specifically, a point giving effect in which the given point is always not 0 is set in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set in the final game round of the continuous effect. In addition, in the point giving scenario, the number of points whose total given points is always not 0 is set for the carry-over game rounds after the carry-over game rounds executed first among the carry-over game rounds in the continuous performance.

By doing so, it is possible to give a player who desires to receive points a sense of anticipation that the accumulated points will be carried over with the completion of the game round as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. In addition, when the accumulated points are carried over at the end of the game round, it is expected that the points will be awarded to the player who desired to be awarded the points in the game round executed after the game round. In addition to being able to impart a sense of excitement, it is also possible to impart an uplifting feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

For example, when the player is aware that if the accumulated points are carried over, the points will be awarded in the next and subsequent game rounds, and the game round is likely to end even though the accumulated points are 9 points. In some cases, if the accumulated points are carried over, the points are always given in the subsequent game cycle and the button-pressing effect is executed, so that the player is given a strong sense of expectation for the accumulated points to be carried over. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game round being executed. In addition, in such a situation, when accumulated points are carried over, it is possible to impart a strong sense of achievement to the player.

In addition, when the accumulated points in the game round being executed are carried over to the next game round, the points are not necessarily awarded in the game round after the game round being executed. A configuration may be adopted in which, when a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a blue crawfish character appears) is executed, points are always awarded in game rounds after the game round. By doing so, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation to the next game round to the player who has executed the predetermined effect in the current game round.

A7-3. Variant 3:
In the first embodiment, in the point giving effect executed in a series of game rounds in which the continuous effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of executing the point giving effect in which the given point is 0 is limited. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit is set on the number of times a point giving effect with zero points is executed in the point giving effect that is executed only once. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

A specific description will be given. As described above, the number of points to be given is set in the point giving scenario for each point giving effect executed in the final game round of the continuous effect. Therefore, a limit is set on the number of points to be set to "0" as the value of the number of points to be provided for each point-giving effect. For example, as the number of points to be given, the value "0" is limited to three times or less.

In addition, in the production pattern used for the game round in which the point giving production is executed only in the carryover game round and the game round only once, the value of the number of points to be set for each point giving production is set to "0". Set limits.

In this way, a player who recognizes that the number of executions of the point giving performance with the given point of 0 has reached the upper limit is given a strong sense of expectation for the execution of the point giving performance. can be done. This is because when the number of executions of the point giving effect with the given point of 0 reaches the upper limit, points are always given when the point giving effect is executed after that. Therefore, even when the point giving performance with the given point of 0 is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the point giving performance with the given point of 0 reaches the upper limit. be able to.

That is, in the case where the point giving effect is executed, if the given points are not 0, the points are given, so that the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and when the given points are 0. Even so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation (a feeling of anticipation that the number of executions of the point giving effect in which the given point is 0 reaches the upper limit). As a result, the expectation of the player is increased in either case of executing the point giving performance in which the given points are not 0 or in the case of executing the point giving performance in which the given points are 0.例文帳に追加can be done.

A7-4. Variant 4:
An effect executed when accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game round (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled effect) may be configured to be executable in a game round. Further, the non-filling effect may be executed at a predetermined rate when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points.

Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the greater the number of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed, the more the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round will be a "jackpot". may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is "big win" in the game round, the setting is made so that the performance scenario in which the unfilled effect is executed is likely to be selected. For example, when the production scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers for lottery and table data for lottery, the lottery table is set so that the unfilled production is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit". Set data. Then, the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the production scenario being selected is low (for example, less than 30%) except when the result of the big win lottery is "big win". Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "big win", the point grant scenario applied to the production scenario has a relatively large number of accumulated points (for example, 8 points or 9 points) immediately before the unfilled production is executed. ) to apply the point award scenario set to be Conversely, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reaching)", the point grant scenario applied to the production scenario has a relatively small amount of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled production is executed (for example, 4 points or 5 points) is applied.

By doing so, even when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game cycle and the button pressing effect is not executed, when the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points, the more The degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a "jackpot" in the predetermined game times is high, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. That is, when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game round and the button-pressing effect is not executed, and when the accumulated points are relatively large, the player expects that the uncharged effect will be executed. It can give you a feeling.

Further, the unfilled effect may employ a configuration in which the content of the effect differs depending on the amount of accumulated points before the unfilled effect is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the details of the non-charging effect regardless of the amount of accumulated points, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, an effect to be executed after the unfilled effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled development effect) may be configured to be executable in the game round. In addition, the case where the accumulated points are less than 10 points and the uncharged development effect is executed after the uncharged effect is executed is more favorable than the case where the accumulated points are 10 points or more and the button pressing effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a “jackpot” is high. For example, when the production scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers and lottery table data, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot", the unfilled production and the unfilled development production are executed. Set lottery table data. Then, when the result of the big win lottery is other than "big win", the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the production scenario being selected is low (for example, less than 5%). Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than "big win", the lottery table data is set so that the probability of selecting the performance scenario is lower than the probability of selecting the performance scenario including the button pressing performance. By doing so, the configuration can be realized.

By doing so, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the relevant game time is "big win" is higher when the unfilled development effect is executed than when the button pressing effect is executed. is a high configuration. Therefore, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game cycle and the button pressing effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, then the unfilled development effect is executed for the player. It can give a strong sense of expectation about what will be done. Furthermore, when the unfilled development effect is executed, the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is a "jackpot" is higher than when the button pressing effect is executed, so the unfilled development effect is performed. A stronger sense of expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the is executed. In summary, when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more, the button-pressing effect is executed, so that it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation, and even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points. , giving the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the unfilled performance, and further giving the player a strong sense of expectation for the execution of the unfilled development performance when the unfilled performance is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

A7-5. Variant 5:
In the first embodiment, the first executed game times displayed in the first executed game times display area J1, the first reserved game times displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, and the second executed game times displayed in the second executed game times display area J2 are displayed. The second execution game round display and the second reserved game round display shown in the second reserved display area Ds2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as game round display) are changed in display mode. may Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of awarding points (that is, the timing of executing the point award effect) and the timing of changing the display mode of the game cycle display have a temporal correlation.

In this case, the display mode of the game round display may suggest the possibility (expectation) of winning a big win in the big win lottery related to the game round corresponding to each game round display.

In this way, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by executing the change of the display mode of the game cycle display and the awarding of the points in such a manner that the timing is correlated.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the point giving effect is executed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after changing the display mode of the game round display during execution of the game round. In this case, the player who recognizes that the display mode of the game round display has changed and the sense of anticipation has increased is further made to recognize that the point giving effect has been executed within a predetermined time, thereby making it even stronger. It can give a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game round display and the timing for executing the point giving effect are made at the same time during execution of the game round. In this case, the player's sense of anticipation can be synergistically increased by allowing the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the point giving effect. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game round display is changed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after the point giving effect is executed during the execution of the game round. In this case, by making the player, whose sense of anticipation has increased after recognizing that the point giving effect has been executed, recognize that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed within a predetermined period of time, the effect becomes even stronger. It can give a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode after the change of the game cycle display and the number of points to be given by the point giving effect are correlated. By doing so, when the display mode after the change of the game cycle display is a mode that meets the expectations of the player, that is, the display suggesting that the display mode after the change of the game cycle display has a high degree of expectation. When it is in the mode, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is relatively large, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of superiority.

Furthermore, the higher the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change of the game cycle display, the more points are given by the point granting effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display. configuration may be employed. That is, when the display mode after the change of the game cycle display is the first display mode, the number of points given by the point giving effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode is set to the first display mode. If the display mode after the change in the display of the game cycle is a second display mode that suggests a higher level of expectation than the first display mode, the change in the display mode and the time When the number of points given by the point giving effect executed with correlation is the second number of points, the average value of the second number of points is larger than the average value of the first number of points. You may

By doing so, when the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is "big win" is high, the probability of changing the display mode of the game round display to the second display mode is high, and furthermore, When the game cycle display changes to the second display mode, points are awarded with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display more than when the game cycle display changes to the first display mode. Since there are many cases where the number of points given by the performance is large, the change of the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the point giving performance are executed with the timing being correlated with each other, so that the results of the jackpot lottery can be improved. The expectation of the player can be synergistically increased.

It should be noted that any of the above configurations can be realized by setting the display mode of game cycle display in the effect scenario. For example, by using an effect scenario in which the display mode of the game round display changes from white to red at the same time as the execution of the point giving effect, during the execution of the game round, which is one of the configurations described above, It is possible to achieve a configuration in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game cycle display and the timing for executing the point giving effect are made at the same time.

In addition, for a production scenario in which the display of game rounds is set to be changed to a display mode that suggests a high degree of expectation, a point that is executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the display of the game rounds. By applying the point grant scenario in which the value of the number of points granted by the grant effect is set to a large value, the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change in the game cycle display, which is one of the configurations described above, is increased. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the higher the value, the greater the number of points given by the point giving effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display. Shapes, patterns, colors, characters, and the like can be adopted as the display mode of the game cycle display.

Also, the effect having a temporal correlation with the timing of changing the display mode of the game round display is not limited to the configuration in which the point awarding effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the timing at which a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) is executed has a temporal correlation. Even in this way, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation for the result of the big winning lottery.

A7-6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, in the point giving scenario (see FIG. 46), the number of points to be given is set in advance for each point giving effect executed in the final game round of the continuous effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given in each point giving effect is set in real time during execution. For example, in the point giving scenario, the number of executions of the point giving effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect and the total number of points to be given in the final game of the continuous effect are set as information, and the final game of the continuous effect is set. A lottery may be performed based on the information after the start of the round to determine the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to guess the pattern in which the points are awarded, and the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

A7-7. Variant 7:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect for reducing accumulated points is executed. By doing so, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's sense of anticipation for the game. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a button-pressing effect is executed when the points are increased and reached 10 points. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect to be subtracted is executed, and the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number of points or less. For example, 10 points may be accumulated at the start of a game round, and the points may be reduced at any time by an effect of subtracting the points, and when reaching 0 points, a button pressing effect may be executed.

A7-8. Modification 8:
In the above-described embodiment, the timing for executing the point-giving effect is set in advance in the effect scenario. A detailed description will be given below.

In the above-described first embodiment, when setting the effect for the final game round of the continuous effect, a configuration using an effect scenario in which the timing of executing the point giving effect is preset is adopted. A configuration using a production scenario in which one or a plurality of timings (hereinafter, also referred to as candidate timings) are set as candidates for the timing at which the point-giving production can be executed, that is, the timing for executing the point-giving production is adopted. Further, in the first embodiment, when setting the effect of the game round in which the point giving effect is executed using only one game round, and when setting the effect of the carry-over game round, the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are set in advance. A configuration using a production scenario in which one or a plurality of candidate timings is set is adopted.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect scenario and a point-giving scenario of the final game round of continuous effect in Modification 8. As shown in FIG. FIG. 64 shows, as an example, an effect scenario and a point awarding scenario of the carry-over game round and the final game round of the continuous effect in which the number of executed games (Np)=2. In this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the effect scenario for the final continuous effect game is set based on the provisional fluctuation time of the game cycle set for the final continuous effect game. As described above, in the production scenario in this modified example, the timing for executing the button-pressing production is set, but the timing for executing the point-giving production is not set. A plurality of candidate timings are set. In the rendering scenario of FIG. 64, candidate timings are indicated by broken arrows. Based on the point giving scenario described later, the sound and light side MPU 92 selects one or a plurality of timings (hereinafter referred to as (also called execution timing).

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, as shown in the jackpot/ready-to-win point award scenario table of FIG. 45, two points are awarded for each execution game count (Np) with respect to the point award scenario corresponding to each production scenario. Scenarios are set, and after determining the number of executions of continuous performance, one of two point-giving scenarios set corresponding to the number of executions is determined by lottery. On the other hand, in this modification, one point awarding scenario is set for each number of times of execution games (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each production scenario. FIG. 64 shows a point awarding scenario in which the number of times of continuous performance is executed is two (that is, the number of times of executed games is Np=2). As shown in the figure, in the point giving scenario in this modified example, for the final game round of the continuous effect, the total number of points to be given for each period until each button pressing effect set in the effect scenario (hereinafter referred to as Also referred to as period total given points) is set, and for carry-over game rounds, the value of the total given points, which is the total number of points to be given in the game rounds, is set in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

The sound and light side MPU 92 determines the execution timing of the point giving effect and the execution timing of the point giving effect based on the period total giving points and the plurality of candidate timings up to the period of each button pressing effect set in the effect scenario for the last game round of the continuous effect. , and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 64, 13 points are set in the point grant scenario as the total points granted during the period from the start of the final game round of the continuous performance to the button pressing performance 1 (Bt1 in the figure). Ten timings are set in the production scenario. Therefore, for example, one or a plurality of execution timings are determined from 10 candidate timings, then the number of points to be given in the point giving effect to be executed at each decided execution timing is decided, and finally, each point to be given is decided. A configuration is adopted in which the number of points to be given in the performance is determined by lottery using random numbers.

In addition, various methods can be used to determine the execution timing of each point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. For example, an arbitrary value with an upper limit of 13 points, which is the total given points for the period from the start of the final game round of the continuous effect to the button pressing effect 1, is determined by lottery, and the determined value is used for the first point giving effect. Decide on the number of points to be given in Next, an arbitrary value is determined by lottery with the upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting the number of points to be granted in the first point grant performance from 13 points of the total grant points during the period, and the determined value is used in the second point grant performance. Determine the number of points to be awarded by In this way, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect is determined in order by lottery, the determined number of points is subtracted from the total given points of 13 points during the period, and finally the remaining number of points is 0. The lottery will be held until Since the number of candidate timings from the start of the final game round of the continuous effect to the button pressing effect 1 is 10, if the remaining given points are not 0 when the 9th lottery ends, the final The number of points to be given in the tenth point giving performance is automatically determined as the remaining number of points. After the number of executions of the point giving performance and the number of points to be given in each point giving performance are determined in this way, the execution timing corresponding to the number of times of execution of the point giving performance is selected from the candidate timings of the performance scenario. determined by

As in this modified example, by determining the timing of executing the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect by lottery, even in the same production scenario, the execution timing and the giving of the point giving effect can be achieved. Since the number of points awarded does not form a pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored, to make various guesses, and to give the player a sense of anticipation. For this reason, in this modified example, only one point award scenario is set for each number of times (Np) of games executed with respect to the point award scenario corresponding to each production scenario. That is, in the present modification, a plurality of point awarding patterns are set even if only one point awarding scenario is set for each execution game number (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each production scenario. It is possible.

Also, in the above description, the method for determining the timing of executing the point grant effect in the final game round of continuous effect and the number of points to be given in each point grant effect was described, but the determination method is the carryover game in the continuous effect. It can also be used in times. In the first embodiment, the execution timing of the point giving effect in the case of executing the point giving effect in the carryover game round and in the case of executing the point giving effect in one game time is set in advance in the effect pattern. However, as in this modified example, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, first, the effect scenario is determined based on the variation time of the carry-over game round. As shown in FIG. 64, in the effect scenario prepared for the carry-over game round, a plurality of candidate timings are set in the same way as the effect scenario in the last game round of the continuous effect. Then, based on the candidate timing set in the production pattern of the game round and the total given points set in the game round, the point giving effect is executed by lottery in the same way as the last game round of continuous production. The timing to do so and the number of points to be given in each point giving performance are determined. In the above-described first embodiment, an effect pattern is used in which the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are preset, but the timing of executing the point giving effect as in this modification and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined by lottery, so that a plurality of candidates can be obtained in the same manner as in the final game round of continuous effect in this modification without using the effect pattern as in the first embodiment. A production scenario in which timing is set can be used. By doing so, even in the production scenario in which the same production is executed, the execution timing of the point giving production and the number of points to be given do not form a pattern, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored and the game is played. It is possible to make the person make various guesses, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation.

Further, in the first embodiment, the effect pattern of the carry-over game round corresponds to the total given points set in the point grant scenario determined based on the last game round of the continuous effect and the variation time in the carry-over game round. A performance pattern is determined by referring to a point-giving performance pattern table. On the other hand, in this modification, regardless of the total given points, the effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time in the carry-over game round, and the candidate timing set for the determined effect pattern and the total given points. Then, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a point giving performance pattern table corresponding to the variation time of the carry-over game round and the total given points, and it is possible to provide the point giving performance pattern table corresponding only to the variation time. In other words, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of production patterns that are suitable only for the variable time period without considering the total given points. Since the timing of awarding points for each performance pattern is determined by lottery, the performance pattern and the timing of awarding points do not become a pattern, and expectations can always be imparted to the player. .

A7-9. Modification 9:
In the eighth modification, the point grant scenario records the total grant points to be granted in the game round for the period corresponding to the carry-over game round, and for the final game round of continuous production, each button pressing effect is recorded. Although the total points given during the period until the execution is recorded, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the following configuration can be adopted, for example.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modification 9. FIG. In this modification, the point grant scenario does not set the total grant points for the period corresponding to the carry-over game round, and is granted from the start of the carry-over game round to the most recently executed button-pressing effect. The number of points to be given or the number of points to be given from the button-pressing effect to the button-pressing effect to be executed next, that is, the period total given points is set. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 65, the total given points are set during the period from the start of the carry-over game round to the execution of the button pressing effect (Bt1) of the final game round of the continuous effect.

The configuration of the production scenario is the same as that of the eighth modified example. That is, one or a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario of the carry-over game round and the effect scenario of the final continuous effect game round. Then, the timing to execute the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are the number of points to be given until each button pressing effect set in the point giving scenario and each button set in the effect scenario Based on the candidate timing up to the pressing effect, it is determined by lottery as in the eighth modification. By doing so, the timing of executing the point granting performance across the carryover game round and the continuous performance final game round and the number of points to be granted in each point granting performance are determined by lottery. As a result, it is possible to further suppress patterning of the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given.

A7-10. Modification 10:
The point giving effect is not limited to the mode of effect shown in the first embodiment (the effect in which the turtle character gives points), and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the point giving effect in the tenth modification. As shown in FIG. 66(a), for example, an image showing a roulette wheel for determining points to be awarded may be displayed on the display surface 41a. The roulette wheel displays numbers (eg, 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that can be awarded. After spinning the roulette, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the rotation of the roulette is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 66(c), points corresponding to the number indicated by the arrow stopped on the roulette are given. do. By setting the point giving effect in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the points to be given during the period when the roulette wheel is spinning. In addition, since roulette includes "0 (zero)" as the number of points to be given, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency in addition to expectations.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the point-giving effect straddles a plurality of game rounds. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of the roulette is not stopped in the game round in which the rotation of the roulette is started, and the rotation of the roulette is stopped in the game round after the game round. In this way, by executing the point giving effect (hereinafter also referred to as carry-over point giving effect) that spans multiple game rounds, the expectation and sense of urgency for the points given to the player for a long period of time across the game rounds. can be granted.

For example, when a game round is suspended, if it is decided to give points in the game round, in the game round executed prior to the game round (previous game round), the carryover point award effect is performed. A process of setting the effect scenario of the preceding game round so that the shown roulette moving image is displayed on the display surface 41a is executed. When it is decided to give points in the reserved game round (holding game round), if the preceding game round has not yet been executed, the carrying over point giving effect is executed in the preceding game round. Set the production scenario. Also, at the time when it is decided to give points in the reserved game round (holding game round), if the preceding game round to be executed prior to the reserved game round has already been executed, at that point Then, in real time, display of a roulette moving image showing a carry-over point imparting effect is started in the preceding game in progress. By displaying the moving image layer of the roulette showing the carry-over point giving effect as a layer higher than the moving image layer of the effect in the preceding game time, the point giving effect can be started from the preceding game time. In this case, for example, by displaying the roulette animation showing the carry-over point giving effect at a position close to the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to suppress the player's difficulty in visually recognizing the display of the effect animation in the preceding game round. can do.

Note that, in the carry-over point imparting effect of this modification, the first effect is the effect from when the roulette wheel is rotated until the rotation of the roulette wheel stops thereafter, that is, the effect suggesting that points are awarded. The rotation of stops and the points to be given are notified, and the image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points of the stage St changes and the accumulated points after the points are given are displayed. That is, the points are given. If the effect indicating that is the second effect, the first effect is started in the preceding game time, and the second effect is executed in the game time executed after the preceding game time, Various aspects can be adopted.

By adopting a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game round and the second effect is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round, the following effects can be created. The first effect can give the player a feeling of anticipation that points may be awarded. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that points are awarded, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the points have been awarded, and a sense of superiority and satisfaction is imparted. can be done. Further, by combining the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of this modified example, the following effects can be created. Assuming that the preceding game round is the first game round and the game round executed after the preceding game round is the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the points given in the second game round is the first game round. There are cases where it starts in a game round and cases where it starts in a second game round. In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game round, points are awarded in the predetermined game round and in game rounds executed after the predetermined game round. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed, by making him/her guess which case it is.

It should be noted that, as a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game round and the second effect is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round, the first game is performed from the start to the end of the first effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the second effect is executed in the second game round, and the second effect is executed in the second game time from the start to the end. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which an effect is started in a game round and the rotating roulette is stopped in the first effect, and the second effect is executed from the start to the end in the second game round. Also, any of these configurations may be adopted at the same time. When any of the configurations is adopted, and a configuration in which the point-giving effect does not extend over the game rounds is also combined, the player who recognizes that the first effect has started in a predetermined game round will first receive a roulette wheel. To provide a sense of enjoyment and anticipation to speculate whether or not the rotation of will stop in the relevant game round. If the roulette stops in the relevant game round, whether the points corresponding to the number of awarded points indicated by the stop of the roulette will be awarded in the relevant game round, or in the game round after the relevant game round Gives a sense of enjoyment and anticipation of guessing whether it will be given. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of enjoyment and anticipation in stages.

In addition, as described in the first embodiment, accumulated points may or may not be reset at the end of a game round. You can draw attention to the points. Furthermore, according to this modification, when the first effect is executed, points are awarded in the predetermined game round, and points are awarded in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. , allowing the player to pay attention to transitions between game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various expectations at the time of transition of the game cycle.

Note that the first effect and the second effect in this modified example are not limited to the configuration described in this modified example, and various effects can be adopted. For example, among the point giving effects in the first embodiment, the effect until a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped is adopted as the first effect. Then, a turtle character drops a pearl displaying the number of points to be given, the pearl reaches the stage St, the image of the pearl changes to correspond to the accumulated points, and the point giving effect is completed. You may employ|adopt as a 2nd production|presentation.

A7-11. Modification 11:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point giving effect differs according to the number of points awarded in the point giving effect. For example, the color of the turtle shell, which is the character displayed in the point awarding effect, is displayed in white when the points to be awarded are 0 to 2 points, and is displayed in yellow when the points to be awarded are 3 to 6 points. If the points to be awarded are 7 to 9 points, it will be displayed in blue. If the points to be awarded are 10 to 15 points, it will be displayed in green. In some cases, it may be possible to employ a configuration that displays in red. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of given points, the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point giving effect is determined according to the size of the read given points. Then, in step S12304, a command for starting moving image display for point giving effect is transmitted to display side MPU 102 including information on the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point giving effect. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the turtle shell color information included in the point-giving effect moving image display start command, and sets the shell color according to the information. A process for displaying the effect animation of the point giving effect in which the turtle is displayed on the pattern display device 41 is executed. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, in addition to displaying the number of points displayed in the point giving effect, the color of the turtle's shell can give the player a sense of expectation and superiority.

In addition, for example, in the above-described first embodiment, the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point awarding effect has a configuration in which the number of points granted by the point awarding effect is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the number is not displayed and the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle differs according to the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. Such a configuration can also be realized by the same process as the above-described process of displaying the color of the turtle's shell in different colors according to the number of points awarded in the point award effect. That is, in step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of given points, the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point giving effect is determined according to the size of the read given points. Then, in step S12304, a command for starting moving image display for point giving effect is transmitted to display side MPU 102 including information on the color of pearls to be displayed in point giving effect. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the pearl color information included in the point-giving effect moving image display start command, and displays pearls of a color corresponding to the information. A process for displaying the effect animation for the point giving effect on the pattern display device 41 is executed. In the case of this modification, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character in the point giving effect, the display-side MPU 102 does not display the number of points on the pearls dropped by the turtle character. A process for displaying the moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp the points to be awarded even if the execution of the point giving performance is started, so that the player is given a sense of expectation for the number of points to be given. be able to. Furthermore, since the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle differs depending on the number of points awarded, the player is given the pleasure of guessing the number of points awarded based on the color of the pearls. can be done.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which characters displayed in the point giving effect are different depending on the number of points awarded in the point giving effect. For example, the character to be displayed in the point giving effect is set to a turtle character when the points to be given are 0 to 2 points, and is set to an octopus character when the points to be given are 3 to 6 points. , when the points to be given are 7 to 9 points, it is set to a crab character, and when the points to be given are 10 to 15 points, it is set to a shark character, and the points to be given are 16 to 20 points. In the case of , a configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set. This configuration is also realized by the same processing as the configuration described above, that is, the configuration that changes the color of the turtle's shell and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle according to the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. be able to.

In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving points, the mode of the point giving effect to be executed is changed to the point giving effect to be executed in other cases. You may employ|adopt the structure which sets to a different aspect. For example, in a state where the accumulated points are 3 points, if a point giving effect in which 9 points are awarded is executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set in place of the turtle character displayed during the point giving effect. In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and the number of points given by the point giving effect is equal to or larger than a predetermined size. In some cases, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode different from the point giving effect to be executed in other cases is set. For example, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) due to the execution of the point giving effect and the points are given, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is 8 points or more A configuration is adopted in which the character to be displayed in the point awarding effect is set to a crab character instead of a turtle character, and the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. good too.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, and the point giving effect is performed. It can be realized by determining whether or not the points given in the effect are equal to or greater than a predetermined size (eg, 8 points). That is, in the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, and in the point giving effect When it is determined that the points to be given are equal to or larger than a predetermined size (e.g., 8 points), display of a moving image for effecting point giving is started, in which the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. A command is sent to the display side MPU 102 . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect animation display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying, on the pattern display device 41, a point-giving effect effect animation in which a crab character drops larger pearls than usual. do. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. By adopting such a configuration, when the crab character executes the point awarding effect in which the crab character drops larger pearls than in the normal case, it is more appealing to the player than when the normal point awarding effect is executed. It can give a sense of expectation and a sense of superiority. In addition, during the game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the point giving effect will not be executed, and furthermore, it is possible to see if the point giving effect in which the crab character drops larger pearls than usual is executed. Such expectations can be given to the player.

In addition, the following configurations may be adopted. For example, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the button pressing effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect executed before the super ready-to-win effect is executed is set to a different aspect from the aspect of the point giving effect executed in other cases. . More specifically, in a state where the accumulated points are 5 points, a point giving effect of giving 9 points is executed, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points), and the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. When the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the button pressing effect executed by , the character displayed in the point giving effect executed before the super ready-to-win effect is executed is displayed during the normal point giving effect. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set instead of the turtle character. It should be noted that the normal ready-to-win effect is an effect to be executed when the symbol is in the ready-to-win state. The super ready-to-win effect is an effect to suggest to the player that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. In addition, the special reach production described later has a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery than when only the normal reach production is executed or when the super reach production is executed in addition to the normal reach production. This is an effect that suggests to the player.

In addition, this configuration is executed after the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and after the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Not only when the production is a super reach production, but when the production executed after the button pressing production executed by the accumulated points exceeding the threshold is a special reach production, or when the jackpot lottery is won It may be applied to the case of an immediate notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a one-shot notification effect). That is, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and after the button pressing effect that is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value, the special ready-to-reach effect is executed. or when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the mode of the point giving effect to be executed is set to a mode different from the mode of the point giving effect to be executed in other cases. do.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. Then, when it is determined that the point-giving effect to be executed is the last point-giving effect to be executed before the button-pressing effect, after the button-pressing effect after the point-giving effect is executed based on the effect scenario Determining the type of production, if it is determined that the production is a specific type of production such as normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, and one-shot announcement production, depending on the type of each production Then, a point giving effect in a special mode different from the other cases is set as the point giving effect before the button pressing effect. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

In this way, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and the effect is executed after the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Depending on the type, points are given by adopting a configuration in which the aspect of the point giving effect executed before the effect is executed is different from the point giving effect executed in other cases. In addition to giving the player a feeling of expectation, it is possible to give the player another feeling of expectation and the enjoyment of speculating about the subsequent game. In addition, since there are a plurality of types of point-giving effects, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the point-giving effects that are executed each time.

That is, in this modification, the effect scenario set for the game round is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to the game round. Then, based on the performance scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the ready-to-win random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game round, a point granting scenario is determined, and the performance scenario and the points are determined. Based on the granting scenario, the aspect of the point granting effect to be executed in the game round is determined.

A7-12. Variant 12:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be employed in which the mode of awarding points suggests the subsequent progress of the game. For example, the mode of awarding points, in which 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded by each point awarding effect three times, suggests that the special ready-to-win effect will be executed after the button pressing effect that is executed thereafter. 7 points, 7 points, 7 points are given by each point giving effect three times. A configuration that suggests that Such a configuration can be realized, for example, as follows.

For point granting scenarios linked to production scenarios in which specific effects such as special reach effects and one-shot announcement effects are set to be executed, each point granting effect set in the point granting scenario This configuration can be realized by presetting the number of points to be given to 3, 4, and 1, for example. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of points given in each point giving effect. In addition, the player can make various guesses about the progress of the game after that based on the manner in which the points are awarded, and the player can be given a greater sense of anticipation.

In addition, the content suggested by the mode of giving points is not limited to the effect executed after that. The result of the lottery may be suggested, or the carryover of accumulated points may be suggested.

A7-13. Variant 13:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which information relating to the mode of giving points that have already been given (hereinafter also referred to as point giving mode information) is displayed. For example, as the point award mode information, a history of the mode in which points were awarded may be displayed. Then, the history of the manner in which the points have been awarded may be displayed using colors, characters, or the like.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the thirteenth modification. FIG. 67 shows how the image of the pearl indicating the points accumulated in the stage St in the point giving effect displays the history of how the points were given.

FIG. 67(a) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the first (first) point giving effect is executed and 4 points are given from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. rice field. In this modified example, the accumulated points are displayed as a white pearl image on the stage St by executing the first point giving effect from the state where accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started.

FIG. 67(b) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the second point award effect is executed and 2 points are awarded from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modified example, the accumulated points are displayed as a yellow pearl image on the stage St by executing the second point giving effect from the state where accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started.

FIG. 67(c) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the third point award effect is executed and 3 points are awarded from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the third point giving effect after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as a yellow-green pearl image on the stage St. .

In this way, the points are awarded by distinguishing the image showing the points accumulated by executing each point giving effect by the color for each point giving effect that triggered the giving of the accumulated points. A history of aspects can be displayed. For example, when the player visually recognizes the image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points shown in the stage St of FIG. can recognize that

This modification is realized, for example, by providing the sound and light side RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 with a grant history storage area, which is a storage area for storing the history of points awarded by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be able to.

68 and 69 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the grant history area. As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the granting history storage area, the number of points granted (the number of executions of the point granting effects) from the state in which accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started, and the number of times of granting The color (display food) for displaying the image of the pearl corresponding to the points accumulated by the point giving effect corresponding to is set in advance, and each time the point giving effect is actually executed, the storage area of the given points (hereinafter also referred to as a given point storage area) stores a value indicating the given points. In the case of the granting history area shown in FIG. 68(a), 4 points are awarded by the first point granting effect, 2 points are awarded by the second point granting performance, and 3 points are awarded by the third point granting performance. known to have been granted.

FIG. 68(b) shows the awarding history storage area when the point awarding effect is further executed once from the state of FIG. 68(a) and 6 points are awarded. In the grant history storage area of this modified example, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, a given point is stored in a storage area to the right of the given point storage area. Since 9 points have already been accumulated in the 1st to 3rd times of giving, as shown in FIG. The 1st to 3rd points are stored in the same column storage area, and the remaining 5 points are stored in the storage area on the right column. Then, when displaying the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St, the display color corresponding to the given points in the rightmost column of the given point storage area and the number of times given is read, and the image of the pearl is displayed on the stage St. display. In this way, by dividing the storage area into units of 10 points, a timer effect (or waiting effect) is executed by accumulating 10 points, the accumulated points are subtracted by 10 points, and the stage St is newly entered. Even when the points are accumulated, the accumulated points are displayed on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given actually executed from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started. Images of pearls can be displayed. Also, the grant history storage area shown in this modified example can cope with a case where 10 or more points are granted in one point grant effect.

FIG. 69 shows the awarding history storage area when the point awarding effect is executed once from the state of FIG. 68(b) and 17 points are awarded. In this case, 5 points out of 17 points are stored in the second column of the given point storage area, resulting in 10 points in the second column storage area. Of the remaining 12 points, 10 points are stored in the third column of the given point storage area, and the remaining two points are stored in the fourth column of the given point storage area. In this way, even when 10 points or more are awarded in one point awarding effect, the rightmost column of the imparted point storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of times of impartation can be read. can display the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given actually executed from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started. .

Also, the timing for storing, reading, and resetting the points given to the given history storage area will be described. In the case of storing the points to be given in the giving history storage area, for example, when the number of given points to be executed is read in step S12302 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the points to be given are stored in the giving history storage area. A configuration of storing in an area can be adopted. At this time, as described above, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the given point is stored in the storage area to the right of the given point storage area.

Regarding reading of the grant history storage area, for example, in step S12310 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the grant points in the rightmost column of the grant point storage area in the grant history storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of grants are displayed. A point accumulation moving image display start command for displaying a pearl image (point accumulation moving image) of a display color corresponding to the number of times points are given is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the point accumulation moving image display start command displays the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given.

As for resetting the grant history storage area, for example, after resetting the accumulated point counter Cpnt in step S12603 of the point reset process (FIG. 59), the grant history storage area is reset. By executing such processing, the configuration in the modification can be realized.

By adopting the configuration of the modification, it is possible for the player to check the history of the manner in which points are awarded, such as the number of executions of the point giving performance and the number of points given in one point giving performance. In addition, the player who has confirmed the history of the manner in which points have been awarded can be made to guess the number of point-giving effects to be executed thereafter, the number of points to be awarded, and the like, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation for the game. . In addition, as in Modification 12, when a configuration is adopted in which points are awarded to suggest the subsequent progress of the game, the history of the manner in which points are awarded can be sent to the player as in this Modification. By making it possible for the player to confirm, it is possible to further prompt the player to speculate about the subsequent progress of the game, to make the player pay attention to the game, and to give the player a sense of expectation. can do.

In this modified example, the history of points awarded is displayed in the color of the pearl image indicating accumulated points. Alternatively, they may be distinguished by a mark, pattern, or the like. Also, the points given for each point giving effect may be directly displayed in numbers. For example, when 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are given by each point giving effect three times, "3.4.1" is displayed on the display surface 41a. In this way, if the player can recognize the history of points awarded, various display modes can be adopted.

In addition, as the point awarding mode information, information may be displayed that allows identification of only the number of points awarded at the time of execution of the most recently executed point awarding effect. For example, among the pearl images displayed as accumulated points on the stage St, only the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the time of execution of the most recently executed point giving effect is the same as the other pearl images. Configurations with different colors, patterns, shapes, and the like may be employed.

A7-14. Variant 14:
As the point giving effect in the first embodiment, a mode in which points are given a plurality of times in one point giving effect may be adopted. For example, among the point giving effects, the effect from when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a to when a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is displayed is called a point giving suggesting effect. When a turtle character drops a pearl displayed with , the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to a pearl image corresponding to the accumulated points, and the effect until the point giving effect ends is called a point giving effect. In the above, after the point giving suggestion performance is executed once, the point giving execution performance is executed twice.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the point giving effect in the fourteenth modification. As illustrated, FIG. 70(a) shows a state in which the point giving suggestion effect is being executed among the point giving effects. In other words, it shows how an effect is executed from the appearance of a turtle character from the right end of the display screen 41a to the start of dropping pearls indicating the number of points to be awarded. FIG. 70(b) shows how the first point-giving execution effect is executed after the point-giving suggestion effect is executed. As illustrated, the point award execution effect is an effect indicating that 4 points are awarded. FIG. 70(c) shows how the second point-giving effect is executed after the first point-giving effect is executed. As illustrated, the point award execution effect is an effect indicating that 5 points are awarded. FIG. 70(d) shows a state in which the second point giving effect is finished and the point giving effect is finished.

By adopting such a configuration, the player who recognizes the point giving suggestion performance has an expectation of how many times the point giving execution performance will be executed after that, that is, how many times the points are given. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as whether. In addition, when the point granting suggestion performance is executed once and then the point granting execution performance is executed a plurality of times, it is recognized that the point granting suggestion performance has been executed, and then the point granting execution performance is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be imparted to the player who has guessed that the game will be played.

In FIG. 70, an example was described in which two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect. Integer) number of point award execution effects may be executed. Also, the value of N may be different for each point giving effect.

The point-giving effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to one point giving effect are calculated. Divide the value (e.g. 9 points) into two (e.g. 4 points and 5 points), give one point (4 points) of the divided point value in the first point award execution effect, and execute the second point award This can be realized by giving the other point (5 points) of the point value divided by the effect. According to such a process, it is sufficient to obtain one point value set in the point giving scenario corresponding to the point giving suggestion effect to be executed. That is, even when the point giving execution effect is executed N times for one point giving suggesting effect, it is sufficient to acquire one point value set in the point giving scenario. Then, the acquired point value is divided by N and used for each point giving execution effect. Therefore, even if the point giving execution effect is executed N times in one point giving effect, the process from the point giving scenario to the process of acquiring the value of the points to be given is the same regardless of the value of N. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Also, the value of points to be set in the point giving scenario in advance can be set regardless of the value of N, and the setting of the number of points to the point giving scenario can be simplified.

In addition, the point giving effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the first embodiment, points corresponding to two point giving effects are obtained. Get the value. For example, if the number of points set for the first point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 4 points, and the number of points set for the second point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 5 points, , acquires the point value corresponding to the two point giving effects. Then, after executing one point giving suggestion effect, the first point giving execution effect is executed using the 4 points set as the first point giving effect in the point giving scenario, and then , the second point giving execution performance is executed using 5 points, which is the number of points set as the second point giving performance in the point giving scenario. The above configuration can also be realized in this way. According to such a process, in the case where the point giving execution effect is executed N times for one point giving suggestion effect, the number of times (N times) of the point giving execution effect to be executed is determined from the point giving scenario. Since it is only necessary to acquire the corresponding number (N) of point values, there is no need to execute the process of dividing the point value corresponding to one point awarding effect by N, as in the above configuration. Processing can be simplified.

A7-15. Modification 15:
In the above-described first embodiment, the mode of the point giving effect is a mode suggesting that the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St will be added. For example, taking the point giving effect shown in FIG. 12 as an example, 4 points have already been accumulated in the stage St as accumulated points, and furthermore, when the point giving effect is executed, the pearl dropped by the turtle A point-giving effect is executed in a manner indicating that the number of points displayed (3 points) is added to the number of points already accumulated (4 points). As described above, the mode of the point awarding effect in the first embodiment is a mode suggesting that the points to be newly given are added to the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St (hereinafter also referred to as the addition mode). called). Then, when the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed, the number of points obtained by adding the points given by the point giving effect of the addition mode to the points displayed as the accumulated points becomes the new accumulated points. displayed as However, the aspect of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition aspect, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, it is possible to employ a point giving effect in a manner suggesting that the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St will be multiplied (hereinafter also referred to as a multiplication manner).

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the multiplication mode point giving effect. 71(a), after the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the turtle character drops pearls as shown in FIG. 71(b). However, "x2" indicating multiplication processing is displayed on the pearl. Then, as shown in FIG. 71(c), when the pearl displayed as "x2" reaches the stage St, it has already reached the stage St as accumulated points corresponding to the "x2" displayed on the pearl. The number of points (8 points) obtained by multiplying the displayed 4 points by 2 is displayed as new accumulated points.

Such a configuration can be realized as follows. For example, in a point award scenario, the point value corresponding to the multiplication mode point award effect is set. At this time, let X be the value of accumulated points up to the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, let A be the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points in the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, and set the point giving effect of the multiplication mode to the point giving scenario. When the point value corresponding to is Y, the value of Y calculated as Y=XA-X is set in the point grant scenario as the point value corresponding to the point grant effect in the multiplication mode. In addition, the production scenario is set so that a multiplication mode point awarding production is executed. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player who recognizes the point giving effect of the multiplication mode a sense of expectation for the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points, and to play the game against the point giving effect of the multiplication mode. can draw people's attention. In addition, when the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is executed, the player who recognizes that the turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a and guesses that the point giving effect of the adding mode will be executed. , can give surprise and greatly improve the sense of anticipation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the multiplication aspect of the point giving effect is controlled (changed) in accordance with the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points. For example, depending on the value multiplied by the accumulated points, the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle differs, or the character that appears differs (for example, an octopus appears instead of the turtle). good too. By doing so, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the multiplication mode point giving effect.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the multiplication mode point imparting effect is executed, the number of points larger than the number of points obtained by multiplying the accumulated points already accumulated is displayed as a new accumulated point. For example, when 4 points have already been accumulated, a multiplication mode point giving effect is executed. In the multiplication aspect of the point giving effect, the pearl dropped by the turtle is displayed with “×2” indicating multiplication processing. In this case, normally, 8 points (4 points x 2) are displayed as new accumulation points when "x2" indicating the multiplication process reaches stage St. , the number of accumulated points greater than 8 points (for example, 10 points) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes new accumulated points greater than the accumulated points obtained by multiplying the already accumulated accumulated points.

In addition, as the mode of the point granting effect, there are cases where the point granting effect of the addition mode is executed and the point granting effect of the multiplication mode is executed, so that the point granting effect of the addition mode is provided to the player. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency and tension as to whether the effect is to be executed or the multiplication mode point awarding effect is to be executed.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the point giving performance of the addition mode is executed, the number of points larger than the number of points added as a result of adding to the accumulated points already accumulated is displayed as new accumulated points. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes the new accumulated points that are greater than the accumulated points added to the already accumulated accumulated points.

Note that the mode of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition mode or the multiplication mode, and a configuration for executing point giving effects in various calculation modes, such as the point giving effect in the subtraction mode or the division mode, may be employed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the executed point-giving effect, and to add an intonation to the player's expectation.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect changes during execution of one point giving effect. For example, during the execution of one point giving effect, the addition mode is changed to the multiplication mode, or the multiplication mode is changed to the addition mode, or the point giving effect is changed during the execution of one point giving effect. A configuration in which the mode changes multiple times may be employed. In this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the calculation method executed by the point giving effect has changed, and to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, depending on the calculation method executed by the point giving effect, the value of the new accumulated points after the calculation processing may be greatly different, so by changing the mode of the point giving effect, In addition to imparting a sense of urgency, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectations.

FIG. 72 shows, as an example, an image of a pearl dropped by a turtle (hereinafter also simply referred to as an image of a pearl) when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point giving effect. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of . FIG. 72(a) shows an image of a pearl when the mode of the point giving effect is the addition mode. The image of the pearl indicates that the point-giving effect is the addition mode by displaying "+", which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition. FIG. 72(b) shows an image of pearls in the case where the mode of the point giving effect is the multiplication mode. In the image of the pearl, an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is displayed, suggesting that the point awarding effect is in the multiplication mode.

For example, when changing the mode from the addition mode to the multiplication mode during execution of the point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 72(a) is rotated. 72(b) to change it to "x" which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 72(b). Conversely, if the mode is changed from the multiplication mode to the addition mode during execution of the point-giving effect, rotate the arithmetic symbol “x” indicating multiplication displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 72(b). 72(a) to change it to "+" which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 72(a). By adopting such a configuration, the processing of rotating symbols of almost the same line drawing, such as "+" and "x", can greatly change their meanings. In addition to imparting a great sense of urgency, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectations.

In addition, when the mode is changed multiple times between the addition mode and the multiplication mode during the execution of one point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol displayed in the image of the falling pearl dropped by the turtle is used. The "+" (or "x") may be continuously rotated. Then, the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the pearl reaches the stage St). Corresponding points (images of pearls indicating accumulated points) are displayed on the stage St. By doing so, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the point giving effect.

A7-16. Variant 16:
In the above-described first embodiment, as a display mode of accumulated points, one point is displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and accumulated points are displayed. It can be displayed in various ways.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of the accumulated points shown in this modified example is a display mode in which the shape (image) becomes meaningful only when the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). 73(a) to 73(j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points in order. In the case of the display mode shown in FIG. 73, it is a display mode in which one pearl image is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to give the player an aspiration to form a single meaningful image from partial images, and to increase the accumulated points to 10 points. A sense of accomplishment can be imparted to the player when one meaningful image is formed by reaching the target.

In addition, in FIG. 73, the boundary line (outline) of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, but the pearl corresponding to one point is not limited to such a display mode. A display mode in which the boundary line of the partial image is not displayed may be adopted.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. As shown in the figure, since the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of accumulated points. Therefore, the accumulated points may reach the threshold without the player being aware of it, and the player can be surprised.

In addition, as a display mode of accumulated points, as described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, a mode in which a shape (image) that makes one sense is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). However, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which a shape (image) that becomes meaningful only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value (10 points) is changed at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the accumulated points are displayed in a display mode in which one pearl image is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. image changes to an image of a shellfish showing a timer effect or an image of a shellfish showing a waiting effect, and the accumulated points on the stage St shift to 0 points again, and new accumulated points are accumulated from the 0 point state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75, as a display mode of the new accumulated points, the accumulated points are displayed in a display form in which an image of one whale is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the accumulation points of the stage St. In addition, the player imagines what kind of shape (image) will be formed each time the shape (image) having one meaning is changed only after the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). It is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation.

Further, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the shape (image) formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation points differs depending on the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round. For example, when the one-shot announcement effect is executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold and the button-pressing effect is executed, the image of one sunfish is displayed as the shape that is formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. Then, for example, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value and the special reach effect is executed after the button-pressing effect is executed, the image of one shark is displayed as the shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the accumulated points of the stage St, and to increase the player's sense of expectation in the process of forming the image showing the accumulated points. can be made

A7-17. Variant 17:
In the first embodiment, a countable amount called "points" is used as a grant target, but an uncountable amount may be used. For example, instead of the point giving effect, a effect in which liquid is added to the container displayed on the stage St may be employed.

A7-18. Variant 18:
In the first embodiment, the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is set to 10 points. Any positive value can be adopted as the threshold of .

A7-19. Variant 19:
In the first embodiment, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value, a configuration is adopted in which a button-pressing effect is executed. . For example, when accumulated points reach a threshold value, a predetermined ready-to-win effect may be executed instead of the button-pressing effect. That is, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the game is always ready, so every time a point is awarded, the player can be given a sense of expectation for reach. Moreover, even if the accumulated points reach the threshold value, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing such as a button pressing effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency by making the player guess whether or not a specific process such as a button pressing effect will be executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold value.

A7-20. Modification 20:
In the first embodiment, whether or not the accumulation points are carried over is indicated by changing the color of the stage St, but other methods such as lighting, blinking, or changing the shape of the stage St may be used. In addition, a dedicated lamp or the like may be provided to indicate whether or not accumulated points are to be carried over.

A7-21. Variant 21:
In the first embodiment, the effect operation button 24 is operated in accordance with the timing when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period assigned to the button pressing effect (hereinafter also referred to as the button pressing effect period). It is also possible to employ a mode in which the effect executed during the period from after the button pressing effect period to the end of the button pressing effect period is changed. The time from the start timing of the button-pressing effect period to the timing when the player presses the effect operation button 24 is measured, and the button-pressing effect period starts after the effect operation button 24 is operated according to the measured value. It can be realized by reading and executing the image data for the effect from the effect storage area in which the effect corresponding to the period until the end is recorded. By doing so, it is possible to suppress patterning of the button-pressing effect and make the player pay attention to the button-pressing effect.

A7-22. Variant 22:
In the first embodiment, the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a is the only position (image) that has the function of accumulating awarded points. A configuration in which a plurality of (images) are displayed (at a plurality of locations) on the display surface 41a may be adopted.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 76(a), a first stage St1, a second stage St2, and a third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a as positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points. It is In this modified example, each stage St has different performance functions. Specifically, the effects that are executed when the number of points accumulated in each stage St reaches the threshold are different.

When the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, the one-shot notification effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is a effect of immediately notifying that the player has won the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold. It is possible to recognize that the jackpot lottery is won in the game round.

When the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. After the button pressing effect is executed, the special ready-to-win effect is executed. As described above, in the special reach effect, the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal reach effect is executed and when the super reach effect is executed in addition to the normal reach effect. This is an effect that suggests to the player that it is expensive. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold. It can be recognized that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round is high.

When the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. The normal ready-to-win effect is an effect to suggest to the player that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is not executed. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold. It can be recognized that at least the normal ready-to-win effect is executed in the game round.

From such characteristics of each stage St, the player desires that the most points be accumulated in the first stage St1 among the three stages St, and then the third stage St. It is desired that points be accumulated in the second stage St2, and finally points are desired to be accumulated in the third stage St3.

In the point giving effect shown in FIG. 76, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the pearl image showing the number of points to be given is not displayed. The turtle character progresses from the right end to the left end on the display surface 41a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when the turtle character passes over the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, the number of points to be given is displayed. Drop pearls. As shown in FIG. 76(c), the dropped pearl reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, and then changes to the image of the pearl showing the accumulated points, and the stage St are accumulated as accumulation points.

Such an effect is a target stage St (first stage St1 , second stage St2, and third stage St3) can be realized by setting in advance.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the position (stage St) where the points are accumulated in the point giving effect, and to provide the player with new enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(a), in which stage St points are accumulated for the player who recognizes that the turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a in the point giving effect. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as whether or not the player will be awarded, and to give a feeling of expectation about the number of points to be given. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the player, who has recognized that the turtle character is passing through the upper part of each stage St, has an expectation about the position (stage St) where points are accumulated. A sense of urgency and urgency can be imparted, and a sense of expectation for the number of points awarded can also be imparted. Furthermore, for example, when a pearl indicating the number of points given by a turtle character is dropped on the stage St (for example, the first stage St1) that the player expects, , can give a sense of superiority.

76A and 76B, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the number of points to be awarded is displayed as shown in FIG. 76A. Although the configuration is such that no image is displayed, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is displayed. A configuration that

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the point giving effect in which the number of points to be given is displayed at the start. As shown in FIG. 77(a), in this point giving effect, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the turtle character passes through the upper part of each stage St, the pearls displaying the number of points to be given are displayed in three stages St (first stage St1, 2nd stage St2 or 3rd stage St3). Then, as shown in FIG. 77(c), after the pearl whose number of points to be given is displayed reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, an image of the pearl showing the accumulated points is displayed. , and accumulated as accumulation points in the stage St.

In such an effect, unlike the point giving effect shown in FIG. 76, the number of points to be given is displayed at the start of the point giving effect. In this case, the player who recognizes the number of given points does not necessarily want the points to be accumulated in the first stage St1. In some cases (eg, the second stage St2 shown in FIG. 77), it may be desired that points be accumulated in that stage St. In this way, in the case of the point giving effect shown in FIG. 77, the player determines which stage St has the highest degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery when the accumulated points reach the threshold value. In addition to the consideration, the current point accumulation status of each stage St is also considered to determine the stage St in which points are desired to be accumulated. Therefore, by executing such a point giving effect, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of grasping the state of the game from various angles.

In addition, in addition to the effect of awarding points (point-giving effect), a configuration may be adopted in which another effect related to points is executed. For example, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a threshold reaching effect) may be executed in which the accumulated points in any one of the three stages St reach the threshold when executed.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the threshold reaching effect is started, the crab character holds the pearl and passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the crab character drops the pearl on the target stage St for making the accumulated points reach the threshold value. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the accumulated points of the target stage St for which the accumulated points reach the threshold change to indicate that they have reached the threshold. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St that reaches the threshold is executed. In the example of FIG. 78, the accumulated points of the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, and a timer effect image (image of a whale character and a timer) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, the timer effect (or waiting effect) and the button pressing effect are executed after that, and the button pressing effect is executed. After that, the one-shot announcement effect is executed.

Such a configuration can be realized by setting the threshold reaching effect in advance in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario that are set for the game times in which the threshold reaching effect is executed.

By adopting such a configuration, in addition to the point-giving effect, it is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation regarding the points. Specifically, the result of the game greatly differs depending on which stage St is the target stage St for which the executed threshold reaching effect reaches the threshold. be able to.

In the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3, the effects that are executed when the points accumulated in the stage St reach a threshold value are respectively a one-shot announcement effect and a special reach effect. Although the effect and the normal reach effect have been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which other effects and processes are executed may be adopted.

Further, the points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3 may or may not be carried over across game rounds, as in the first embodiment. may be adopted. As in the first embodiment, since accumulated points may not be carried over, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation so that the accumulated points on each stage will reach the threshold value by the time the game is over. Also, the player who recognizes that accumulation of points has started in at least one of the stages is made conscious of the timing of the end of the game cycle and pays attention to the manner in which accumulated points are awarded on each stage. be able to. In addition, even if the accumulated points on at least one of the accumulated points on the three stages in the game round do not reach the threshold value due to the fact that the accumulated points may be carried over across the game rounds. , the accumulated points are maintained until the next game round without being reset at the end of the game round, and the player can be given a sense of anticipation that there is a possibility that the threshold value will be reached in the next game round. That is, it is possible to give such a feeling of expectation to each accumulated point on the three stages, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to give a feeling of expectation than in the first embodiment. can be increased.

A7-23. Modification 23:
In the above-described first embodiment, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as carry-over change effect) may be executed to make it look as if the game time being executed is changed from a game time that is not a carry-over game time to a carry-over game time.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of carryover change effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 79(a), the color of the stage St is orange, which indicates that the game round is not a carryover game round. When the carryover change effect is executed in the game cycle, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears from the right end of the display screen 41a. Incidentally, when a yellow stage is displayed at the position of the stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the relevant game round is a carry-over game round.

After the octopus character appears on the yellow stage, the yellow stage drops at the timing when the yellow stage and the octopus character pass above the stage St, as shown in FIG. 79(b). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(c), the image of the yellow stage is superimposed on the orange stage St, and then the color of the stage St changes from orange to yellow. That is, by executing the carryover change effect, the color of the stage St changes from the color (orange) indicating that it is not a carryover game round to the color (yellow) indicating that it is a carryover game round.

By adopting such a configuration, the player who recognizes the execution of the carry-over change effect is made to recognize that the game round is changed from a game round that is not a carry-over game round to a carry-over game round, and as a result, the player will be surprised and will be surprised next time. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game round.

In addition, in this modification, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears in the same manner as in the carryover change effect, and the yellow stage and the octopus character pass through the upper part of the stage St, but the yellow stage does not fall. Instead, a dummy effect disguised as a carryover change effect is also executed in which the yellow stage and the octopus character simply pass from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. By executing a dummy effect disguised as a carry-over change effect, the player who recognizes the appearance of the octopus character on the yellow stage guesses whether the image of the yellow stage will fall or not. By doing so, it is possible to guess whether the game round will change to the carry-over game round or not, and to impart a sense of urgency. Then, when the yellow stage falls, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and a feeling of anticipation.

In such a configuration, the carryover change effect is set in advance in the effect scenario and the point grant scenario set for the game round in which the carryover change effect is executed, and the carryover change effect is set in the stage display control process (FIG. 60). When the effect is executed, it can be realized by executing a process of setting the color of the stage St when accumulation of points is started to the color (orange) of the stage St when it is not a carry-over game turn. can.

A7-24. Variant 24:
In the first embodiment, an effect of extending the remaining time indicated by the timer effect (hereinafter also referred to as a timer time extension effect) may be executed.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the timer time extension effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 80(a), the timer effect is being executed. When the timer time extension effect is started, as shown in FIG. 80(a), a fish character with a timer (hereinafter also referred to as an extension timer) appears from the right end of the display screen 41a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(b), when the fish character hanging the extension timer passes above the image of the shellfish and the timer showing the timer effect, the extension timer hanging by the fish character falls. and superimposed on the image of the timer showing the timer effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the remaining time until the button pressing effect indicated by the image of the timer representing the timer effect is extended.

That is, in terms of processing, the remaining time until the button-press effect before being extended is a time set as a dummy remaining time (hereinafter also referred to as a dummy remaining time). Then, when the remaining time of the dummy remaining time approaches 0 (zero) or after it reaches 0 (zero), a timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect is changed to the true remaining time. update on time. By doing so, the configuration of this modified example can be realized.

In such a timer time extension effect, the remaining time indicated by the dummy remaining time indicates the intermediate part of the effect being executed or the time to the end part of the effect being executed, so that the dummy remaining time It is possible to give credibility to the dummy remaining time, and to make the player trust the dummy remaining time. By executing the timer time extension performance and updating the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer performance from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to impart unexpectedness and expectation to the player.

In addition, in this modification, a fish character with an extension timer hanging appears in the same manner as in the timer time extension effect, and the fish character with the extension timer hanging passes the upper part of the stage St, but the extension timer is stopped. A dummy effect disguised as a timer time extension effect is also executed in which the fish character with the timer for extension is not dropped but passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. By executing a dummy performance masquerading as a timer time extension performance, a timer performance is performed by making a player who recognizes the appearance of a fish character hanging a timer guess whether the timer will fall or not. It is possible to guess whether the remaining time indicated by is extended or not, and to give a sense of urgency. Then, when the extension timer falls, the player can be given a feeling of superiority and expectation.

A7-25. Variant 25:
In the first embodiment, the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried over the game rounds, that is, the greater the number of times the carry-over game rounds are continuously executed, the greater the number of times the accumulated points are carried over in succession. You may perform the control which raises the degree of expectation that the big hit is won. As a specific example, compared with the case where the continuous effect final game time is executed after one carryover game time is executed, the continuous effect final game time is obtained after three carryover game times are continuously executed. is executed, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the last game of the continuous presentation is higher.

For example, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game times by the previous determination process, the larger the number of game times (preceding game times) to be executed before the reserved game times, the more the previous To perform control so that a continuous performance is easily executed from a game round to be executed after it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a jackpot lottery of a reserved game round by determination processing to the reserved game round. Specifically, in the effect information setting process, when the number of executed games Np is determined by lottery based on the resettable number of games Fn, the case where the reserved game number (the game number to be processed) is a jackpot. , lottery table data for determining the number of executed games Np is set so that the probability that the number of executed games Np increases is higher than in the case of failure (occurrence of reach). In this manner, control is performed so that the greater the number of times the carry-over game round is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the last continuous performance game round to be executed thereafter. can do. By adopting such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be increased as the carry-over game rounds are continuously executed.

Further, the larger the number of times the accumulated points continuously carry over the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the more the jackpot lottery is won in the jackpot lottery of the final game round of the continuous production executed thereafter. You may perform the control which raises the degree of expectation which has been carried out. For example, when it is determined by the previous determination process that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game, and in the effect information setting process, when determining the effect scenario and the point giving scenario corresponding to the number of times Np of the executed games. In addition, in the case where the pending game round (game round to be processed) is a big hit, compared to the case of loss (reach occurrence), from the carryover game round to the final continuous effect game round, the accumulated points are the threshold Lottery table data for determining the production scenario and the point giving scenario are set so that the probability that the production scenario and the point giving scenario that do not reach (10 points) will be decided is high. By doing so, the greater the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried over to the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the greater the number of times the game rounds are carried over in succession. It is possible to execute control to increase the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the lottery.

By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points are continuously carried over the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from declining when the accumulated points have not reached the threshold value.

A7-26. Variant 26:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is changed. Specifically, even though 10 points have been accumulated, the timer effect or the standby effect is not executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points, and a predetermined number of points exceeding 10 points is accumulated. A configuration in which a timer effect, a standby effect, or a button-pressing effect is executed at a set timing (for example, 15 points), and a timer effect, a standby effect, or a button-pressing effect, even though 10 accumulated points have not been accumulated. may be employed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which the player is not notified that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect has been changed. Such a configuration prepares in advance a production scenario and a point grant scenario specialized for processing with changed thresholds, and only when executing the processing, the value set as the threshold in various processing (usually "10") can be set to the changed threshold value (for example, "15") and executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the button-pressing effect at a timing that the player does not expect, and as a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which such a process in which the threshold value is changed is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round in which the process is executed is a big hit or a loss (reach occurrence). By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed, that is, a player who recognizes that accumulated points exceed 10 points, and a player who recognizes that accumulated points exceed 10 points. Expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the button-pressing performance has been executed in spite of the fact that it is not accumulated.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified by an effect that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is changed. For example, an effect suggesting that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points is executed. By doing so, the player can expect that the button-pressing effect will be executed more easily than when the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is 10 points. Also, in a state in which a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, a state in which 6 points have been accumulated), the accumulated point threshold for executing the button-pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. When the effect suggesting that is executed, the number of points required for executing the button pressing effect has already been accumulated. In this case, the timer effect is executed prior to the button pressing effect immediately after the effect suggesting that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and anticipation. Such a configuration can be realized by presetting the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

A7-27. Variant 27:
In the above-described first embodiment, the first executed game times displayed in the first executed game times display area J1, the first reserved game times displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, and the second executed game times displayed in the second executed game times display area J2 In each game round, in association with each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as game round display) of the second execution game round display shown and the second pending game round display shown in the second pending display area Ds2 A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given is displayed. More specifically, when points are awarded in a predetermined game round, the game round is displayed in the vicinity of the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round (for example, directly above the game round display) in the game round. A display corresponding to the number of points to be given (a display suggesting points to be given) may be displayed. In this case, the suggested point display may be displayed in response to all of the displayed game cycle displays, or the suggested point display may be displayed in response to some of the displayed game cycle displays. You may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player who recognizes the indication of the suggested points to be given, with various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the indicated indication of the suggested points to be given. For example, when a suggested point display is displayed in association with a display of game rounds corresponding to the pending game round, various speculations about the pending game round are made to the player who recognizes the suggested point indication. and expectations can be given. In addition, for example, points are given in the range of less than 10 points in the game round that is being executed, and corresponding to the given point suggestion display that is displayed corresponding to the game round display corresponding to the game round to be executed next. If the sum of the number of points to be given and the number of points currently given is 10 points or more, the display indicating the points to be given corresponding to the display of the game round corresponding to the game round to be executed next is not displayed. Compared with the case, it is possible to make the player yearn to carry over the points to the next game even more, and if the points are carried over, the player is given a great sense of expectation. can do.

In addition, after displaying the display suggesting the given points corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. You may employ|adopt the structure which attaches and displays. For example, immediately above the game round display corresponding to the pending game round (n=1) for the first start port, the image of the number displayed as the indication of the given point is displayed at a predetermined timing, the pending game round ( n=2) is moved directly above the display of the game cycle corresponding to n=2).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to overrule the player's guess based on the indication of the given points displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round. can be given a sense of surprise.

In such a configuration, after displaying the imparted point suggestion display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. This can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point giving scenario so as to be displayed in association with the times display.

In addition, a configuration is adopted in which, after displaying a suggesting display of points to be given corresponding to a different number of points than the number of points to be given in a predetermined game round, a suggesting display of points to be given corresponding to the number of points to be given in a predetermined game round is displayed. You may For example, immediately above the display of the game round corresponding to the reserved game round (n=1) for the first starting port, the image of the number "5" displayed as the indication of the points to be awarded is displayed at a predetermined timing. Change to the image of "7".

It is possible to overturn the guess of the player based on the indication of the points to be given corresponding to the number of points to be given in a predetermined game cycle and to give the player a sense of surprise, Intonation can be imparted to the player's expectations.

Such a configuration can also be realized by presetting the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described. Components having the same functions as those of the above embodiments are described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, winning a winning game, generating a ready-to-win game, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. Further, in the following description, the case where the game ball is shot by operating the operation handle 25 and flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front will be referred to as "left It is sometimes expressed as "hitting". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

82 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 32, an upper first starting port 33 (hereinafter simply referred to as the first starting port 33), a lower first starting port 44 (hereinafter simply referred to as the first starting port 44), A second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44 are entrances into which game balls can enter. The upper first starting port 33 is provided above the center of the game board 30 , and the lower first starting port 44 is provided below the center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed. . Further, the lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a comprising a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 44. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when winning a lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30 . Therefore, the second starting port 34 is provided at a position where a game ball enters when the player hits to the right by operating the operation handle 25 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 44a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the lower first starting port 44 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing. It is possible to enter the lower first starting port 44 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win or a small win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is variable or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 . When a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the first pattern display part 37a displays a segment display corresponding to the lottery result. As a display mode until the display is performed, the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations of the first starting openings (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44) depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, the game ball entered into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 is reserved up to four as a total of the two first starting ports.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is performed triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display device to display lighting, blinking, or a predetermined mode. . When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a liquid crystal display device 41 . The liquid crystal display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays correspondingly. , the symbols are displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to display of fluctuation or predetermined display of symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first upper start port 33, the first lower start port 44, or the second start port 34. In addition, the effect display during the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to when a big win is won is also performed. Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the pattern and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 83(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the second pattern display portion 37b.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 83(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub-display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and where the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. Similarly, in the sub-display area SA, as in the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and where the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. When the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA. If so, the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined depending on the state of the game.

Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern shown in FIG. 83(a). A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are periodic. , a variable display that scrolls in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., the manner of display of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. can adopt various aspects.

Three pattern rows Z4, Z5 and Z6 on the left, middle and right are displayed in the sub-display area SA. In each of the pattern rows Z4 to Z6, patterns of numerals 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern shown in FIG. 83(a). A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L2.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the symbols of each symbol row Z4 to Z6 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. A variable display is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6 and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L2. The mode of the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols. can adopt various aspects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings to the first starting openings (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have won the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 are each maximum. Up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub-display area SA, the first synchronization display area Sync1, and the second synchronization display area Sync2. A configuration in which some or all of these displays are not displayed may be adopted.

B2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning Various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates such as the device 36 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44. 44b, an opening/closing door drive unit 48b for opening/closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first start hole (upper When the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, When the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60. - 特許庁The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the patterns on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 44a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entering. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball entry is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. stored chronologically.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set when the game ball enters the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). It is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of, and when the game ball enters the second start port 34, the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. Stored in Rb.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44), the jackpot stored in the first reservation area Ra The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a big win will occur. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, A process of comparing with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and judging whether or not it will be a big hit is executed in parallel. Below, the first start port (upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44) is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the big hit or not determination processing, and the second start port 34 The process of judging whether or not it will be a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the game ball is executed in parallel, and the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b are changed. A pachinko machine that can be executed in parallel is also called a simultaneous variation machine.

In the following description, a game (also referred to as a game cycle) executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is the first It may be expressed as a game round for the starting opening, and a game (also referred to as a game round) executed when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34 may be expressed as a game round for the second starting opening.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big win, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). is stored in the first reservation area Ra, and is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be realized, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

As another specific example, in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 83(b), the symbols are first stopped in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbols as Z4 are stopped in the symbol row Z6. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are changed and displayed in the symbol row Z5 to achieve a reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z5.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the liquid crystal display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to be in the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=464, 465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb are also called reservation information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, at the timing when the game ball enters the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44), the first A success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area Ra, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. A right/wrong table for each is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the first start port. FIG. 86(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 86(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the jackpot. there is Among the values 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values 0 to 3 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 87(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 87(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. . In addition, 1192 values of 4 to 1195 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit, and 4 values of 1196 to 1199 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is the loss.

Here, the "minor win" is a success or failure result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger the transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode, which will be described later. be. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode. Further, in this embodiment, in the small winning, opening of the variable winning device 36 with an opening period of 1.6 sec occurs once in the open/close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as values of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the second start port (for high probability mode). . In addition, 1176 values of 20 to 1195 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit, and 4 values of 1196 to 1199 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is out.

As described above, in the success/failure table for the second starting port, as in the success/failure table for the first starting port, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode. ing. Furthermore, in the success/failure table for the second starting port, both the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit. When a winning lottery is executed with the entry of a game ball into the 2 start hole as a trigger, it is set to give a small winning with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Winning lottery lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set a jackpot that involves execution of a specific process when winning. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a jackpot type of "specific probability variable jackpot" is set. The specific probability variable jackpot is accompanied by execution of specific processing when winning. Details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 88(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 88(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), and the second The allocation table for the starting port is referred to when a winning lottery is made based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the sorting table for the first starting port includes the number of game balls entering the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). As the base jackpot type, 10R probability variable jackpot, 10R specific probability variable jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 10R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In the 10R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, the 10R probability variable jackpot enters a state of a high frequency support mode, which will be described later, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and becomes a state in which the electric accessory 44a is easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10 times (10 rounds), and the opening and closing control aspect of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. be. In the 10R specific probability variable big win, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the big win is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, the 10R specific probability variable jackpot enters a high frequency support mode state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the electric accessary 44a is in a state where it is easier to open than in the low frequency support mode state. In the case of the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter.

In addition, as described above, the 10R specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of specific processing when winning. Details will be described later.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . Also, for the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, the 8R normal jackpot enters a high frequency support mode state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and becomes a state in which the electric accessory 44a is easier to open than in the low frequency support mode state. However, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100 times. , the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 11" corresponds to the 10R probability variable jackpot, and "12 to 19" corresponds to the 10R specific probability variable jackpot. Correspondingly, "20 to 39" is set so as to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, there are 2R probability variable jackpot and 2R normal jackpot as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. is set.

In the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is two times (two rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In the 2R probability variable big win, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the big win is won in the winning lottery executed after that. Furthermore, the 2R probability variable jackpot enters a state of a high frequency support mode, which will be described later, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and becomes a state in which the electric accessory 44a is easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 2R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is two times (two rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In addition, for the 2R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, the 2R normal jackpot enters a high-frequency support mode state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and becomes a state in which the electric accessory 44a is easier to open than in the low-frequency support mode state. However, in the case of the 2R normal jackpot, the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100 times. , the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 2R normal jackpot. is set to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of distributing the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the game to the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). The case where the big win is achieved based on the entry of the ball and the case where the big win is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are different, and the advantage for the player is clear. A difference is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first start port 44 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of the game ball to the game area PA is the same aspect. The high frequency support mode and the low Frequency support mode and can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 44a is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode when the electric role opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 44a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the lower first start port 44 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the game ball enters the lower first start port 44. Easier to hit the ball. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 89(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89(a), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 89(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

B3. Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the gaming machine.

When the game is started, in step F101, the player is made to hit left, the game ball is caused to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball is entered into the upper first start hole 33.例文帳に追加At this time, the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first starting hole 33, the game round for the first starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is performed.

When the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting port is lost (F101: NO), the game ball is repeatedly entered into the upper first starting hole 33 and the game round for the first starting port is executed.

When a jackpot is won in the win lottery executed in the first starting gate game round (F102: YES), and when the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot (F103: NO), the first starting gate game A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the round (F104). Specifically, a suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit to the right. The player hits to the right according to the suggestive effect after the game round for the first starting hole is finished, and enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode (limited to 100 games). A suggestive effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and causes the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The game cycle for the first starting port is executed (F105).

The high-frequency support mode is continued until the game is played 100 times (F106: NO→F107: NO), and if a jackpot is won within 100 times (F106: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. .

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won within 100 times of playing in the high-frequency support mode (F106: NO→F107: YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

The description returns to step F103. In step F103, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (F103: YES), and when it is not a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: NO), after the game round for the first start opening is completed A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player (F109). Specifically, a suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit to the right. The player hits to the right according to the suggestive effect after the game round for the first starting hole is finished, and enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode (until the next big win is won). A suggestive effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and causes the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The game cycle for the first starting port is executed (F110).

The high-frequency support mode continues until a big win is won in the winning lottery (F110→F111: NO).

When the game round for the first start opening is executed and the jackpot is won (F110→F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

The description returns to step F108. In step F108, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: YES), a round game is executed as a benefit given to the player after the game round for the first starting port is finished. (F112). Specifically, a suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit to the right. The player hits to the right according to the suggestive effect after the game round for the first starting hole is finished, and enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. A suggestive effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and causes the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The game cycle for the first starting port is executed (F113).

The first start-up game round is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first start-up game round to be executed (F114: YES), the first start-up game round is started. At times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency port mode (F115). When a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting game round executed in a normal game machine, the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency port mode after the first starting game round is completed. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the game round for the first starting port.

Also, at this time, at the start of the game round for the first starting port, a suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit to the right.

During the period in which the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery is being executed, the player hits right according to the suggestive effect of prompting the player to hit right, and enters the game ball into the second start opening 34. The ball is thrown, and the game cycle for the second starting port is executed (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the second start-up game round executed during the period during which the first start-up game round in which a big win is won in the winning lottery is executed (hereinafter also referred to as the first start-up winning game round execution period) If the small win is won (F117: YES), one round of the round game is executed as a privilege for the small win (F118). A player enters a game ball into the big winning hole 36a to obtain a prize ball.

On the other hand, even if a small win is not won in the second starting port game round to be executed (F117: NO), if the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second starting is performed again. A game round for mouth is executed.

During the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, the average value of the playing time of the second starting opening game round is compared with the average value of the playing time of the second starting opening game round in other periods. It is set to be short, and it is possible to execute the game round for the second starting opening a plurality of times during the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening. Also, as can be seen from the success/failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) in FIG. do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the game round for the second starting opening a plurality of times during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, and to win a small win a plurality of times, and the player can receive a privilege provided by the small winning. can be obtained multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of awarding a privilege to the player by winning a small win in the second start opening game round during the execution period of the first start opening winning game round is also referred to as "special bonus processing".

The special bonus process is executed until the winning game round execution period for the first start opening ends. That is, it is executed until the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won, which is started in step F114, ends (F119: NO). When the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot has been won ends (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game progresses in different directions depending on whether the type of the jackpot in the game for the first starting port in which the jackpot is won is the normal jackpot, the probability variable jackpot, or the specific probability variable jackpot. The special bonus process will be described below using a time chart.

FIG. 91 is a time chart for explaining special bonus processing.

FIG. 91 shows the process from the start of the game by the player at time T0 to the end of the special bonus process. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress of the game at step F101 in FIG. A player starts a game at time T0, enters a game ball into the upper first starting hole 33, and executes a game round for the first starting hole. At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 83(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41 displays an effect image (hereinafter referred to as the first starting game round) corresponding to the first starting game round. ) is displayed, and in the sub-display area SA, an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening (hereinafter also referred to as a second starting opening effect image) is displayed.

When the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first starting port game round at time T1 (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 90), after the first starting port game round in which the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won (time T2) , a round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 90). As internal processing by the main controller 60, an opening/closing execution mode flag indicating that a round game is to be executed is turned ON. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by the jackpot of the game round for the first start opening.

At time T3, when the open/close execution mode flag turns OFF and the round game ends, the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode as internal processing by the main controller 60 turns ON. Further, as internal processing by main controller 60, a high-probability mode flag indicating that the high-probability mode is set is turned ON. The state at time T3 in FIG. 91 corresponds to the game progress state at step F113 in FIG.

In the state of the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, when the player hits to the left and enters the game ball into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the second A game cycle for one starting port is executed. The game round for the first starting port executed at this time has a shorter average value of the game times of the game rounds than the other periods.

After that, when the game round for the first starting slot in which the jackpot is won is started at time T4, the special bonus process is started. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won is started, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In addition, during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting hole, the average value of the game time of the game round for the second starting hole is compared with the average value of the playing time of the game round for the second starting hole in other periods. set to be as short as possible. In addition, a suggestion effect is executed to urge the player to hit to the right. Note that the process at time T4 in FIG. 91 corresponds to steps F114 and F115 in FIG. Further, as shown in the column of the liquid crystal display device in FIG. 91, when the special bonus process is started, the effect image for the second start opening is displayed in the main display area MA, and the effect image for the first start opening is displayed in the sub display area SA. A production image is displayed.

When the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the second start hole 34 to execute the second start hole game round and wins a small win, each second start hole game round won the small win. After the end, one round of the round game is executed, and as internal processing in the main control device 60, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON after the game round for the second starting port that has resulted in each small win is ended, and is turned OFF after the round game is ended. becomes.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, the first starting port game round is being executed, but the main controller 60 As an internal process of , the measurement of the game time of the game round for the first starting port is interrupted. The period during which the measurement of the game time of the first starting port game round is interrupted is indicated by oblique lines in the chart showing the first starting port game round in FIG. 91 . As shown in the figure, during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting hole, the period during which the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON due to the small winning of the game round for the second starting hole is the period of the game round for the first starting hole. Execution time measurement is suspended.

Then, when the game time of the first start-up game round measured by the internal processing has passed a predetermined time, the first start-up game round ends at time T5, and the special bonus process is executed. finish.

When the game time of the first starter game round passes a predetermined time, the round game corresponding to the first starter game round in which the jackpot was won is executed during the period from time T5 to time T6. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at time T5 and turned OFF at time T6.

After the time T5, the game time set for the game round for the second start opening is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player hits to the right to execute the game round for the second starting port and win a small prize, the game time for one round is extremely long, and the player is in a disadvantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the actions of the player that do not follow the legitimate game flow of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a privilege during the execution of the game round for the first starting slot in which the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of anticipation about the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the game round in which the jackpot is won is completed, the game round in which the jackpot is won is also executed. It can also give you a sense of expectation.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, a special bonus is triggered by winning a small win in the second start-up game round during the execution of the first start-up game round in which a big win is won. Since the privilege (1R round game) is given, even if a big win is won in the first start-up game round, the second start-up game round is executed and a small win is made. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation by allowing the winner to win the prize.

Further, after the end of the first start-up game cycle in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the winning of the big win in the first start-up game cycle, so that the game can be played with a greater sense of expectation. can be given to a person.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting slot game round in which the special bonus process is executed, so the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of executable times of the second start-up game rounds in the special bonus process is based on the game time of the first start-up game rounds corresponding to the period of the special bonus process. In other words, after winning the specific probability variable jackpot, by controlling the playing time of the next game round in which the jackpot is won, the upper limit of the privilege given to the player by the special bonus process can be controlled.

In addition, if the type of jackpot at time T1 shown in FIG. 90 is a specific probability variable jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type at time T4, the start of the first starting opening game round of jackpot winning at time T1 is a special opportunity. Bonus processing is started.

B4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S20104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 94) described later.

In step S20104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 92: S20104).

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the start opening. In step S20201, it is determined whether or not the game ball entered the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44) (start winning). 33, the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first starting port 44). In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (S20201: YES), proceed to step S20202, payout control A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal for outputting a signal to the game hall side management control device that the game ball has entered the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) Perform setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44) (S20201: NO), proceed to step S20205, A detection state of a detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S20207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S20211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S20210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (Fig. 92) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, ie, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command do.

The hold command is the hold information acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the first start port (upper first start port 33, the lower first start port 44) or the second start port 34 and the ball entered. This is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize the determination result (previous determination information) of the pre-determining process based on , before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control unit 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: step S20302) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the liquid crystal display A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20301, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S20302.

In step S20302, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S20302, the process proceeds to step S20303.

In step S20303, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20304.

In step S20304, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20305. In step S20305, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S20305, the process advances to step S20306.

In step S20306, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20307.

In step S20307, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided in the right first starting port 44 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (start of the command output processing in step S20302 in the second and subsequent rounds). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process.

In step S20308, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S20308: NO), in steps S20309 and S20310, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20309, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step S20310, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (S20308: YES), the process returns to step S20302, and each process from step S20302 to step S20307 is performed. Run.

In addition, since the execution time of each process from step S20302 to step S20307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 94: S20305).

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode. The following two functions are realized by determining in step S20401 whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed. As a first function, by not executing step S20403 (and step S20406) while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, a game round is not started while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. can do. In addition, as a second function, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed during execution of the game cycle, the opening/closing execution mode is executed by not executing step S20404 (and step S20407) which will be described later. It is possible to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the game round being executed during the period. Details will be described below.

In step S20401, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20401: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S20402. End the control process. That is, when it is in the opening and closing execution mode, whether the game ball has entered the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44) or the second start port 34 Regardless of whether or not a game round is started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S20401: NO), the process proceeds to step S20402.

In step S20402, it is determined whether or not the flag during execution of the first game is ON. The first game in-execution flag is a flag that turns ON when the game round for the first starting opening is started, and turns OFF when the game round for the first starting opening ends. In step S20402, when it is determined that the flag during execution of the first game is not ON (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20403.

In step S20403, fluctuation start processing for the first start port is executed. The fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is processing for starting the game round for the first starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening will be described later. After executing step S20403, the process advances to step S20405.

On the other hand, in step S20402, when it is determined that the flag during execution of the first game is ON (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, a first fluctuation stop process is executed. The first fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols of the started game round for the first starting port. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S20404, the process advances to step S20405.

In step S20405, it is determined whether or not the second game running flag is ON. The second game running flag is a flag that turns ON when the game round for the second start opening is started, and turns OFF when the game round for the second starting opening ends. When it is determined in step S20405 that the second game running flag is not ON (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20406.

In step S20406, the variation start process for the second start port is executed. The variation start processing for the second starting port is processing for starting the game round for the second starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step S20406, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20405 that the second game running flag is ON (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20407.

In step S20407, a second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the pattern of the started game round for the second starting port. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S20407, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the variation start processing for the first start port will be described. The variation start process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 95: S20403).

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening. In step S20501, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN=0. If it is determined in step S20501 that the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (S20501: NO), the process proceeds to step S20502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20501 that the first start suspension number RaN=0 (S20501: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening is terminated.

In step S20502, the hold information shift process for the first starting port is executed. In the holding information shift process for the first starting port, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S20502, the process advances to step S20503.

In step S20503, determination processing for the first start opening is executed. In the determination process for the first start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, it is determined whether there is a jackpot or a small hit, and the jackpot type is distributed. Distribution judgment and reach judgment for judging presence/absence of reach occurrence are performed. The details of the determination processing for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S20503, the process advances to step S20504.

In step S20504, a variable time setting process for the first start opening is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the first starting port, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S20504, the process advances to step S20505.

In step S20505, the first variation command is set. In the first variation command, the game round this time relates to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) Information indicating whether or not reach occurs and information on the variable time set in step S20504 are included. After executing step S20505, the process advances to step S20506.

In step S20506, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first type command includes 10R probability variable jackpot information, 10R specific probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or off information.

The variation command and the first type command set in steps S20505 and S20506 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, the first symbol display portion 37a is caused to start variable display, and the process proceeds to step S20508 to turn on the first game running flag. After that, the process advances to step S20509 to turn on the first fluctuating flag.

The first game in-execution flag is turned ON when the game round for the first start opening is started, and the fluctuation display in the first symbol display portion 37a is a stop display, and the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the first symbol display stop time has ended. On the other hand, the first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game cycle for the first starting opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a becomes a stop display. .

After executing step S20509, the process advances to step S20510.

At step S20510, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After step S20510 is executed, the fluctuation start processing for the first start port is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing for the first start port>
Next, the hold information shift processing for the first start port will be described. The holding information shift process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start port (FIG. 96: S20502).

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the first start port. In step S20601, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra. After that, the process proceeds to step S20602.

In step S20602, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step S20603.

In step S20603, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20603, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for the first start port>
Next, the determination processing for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start opening (FIG. 96: S20503).

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the first starting port. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the next jackpot. In step S20701, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S20701:YES), it progresses to step S20702.

In step S20702, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 86(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step S20704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20701: NO), the process proceeds to step S20703.

In step S20703, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 86(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step S20704.

In step S20704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success determination in step S20702 or step S20703 is a big hit. In step S20704, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot (S20704: YES), the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, it is determined whether or not the probability variation or normal jackpot flag for the second starting port is ON. In step S20705, when it is determined that the variable probability or normal jackpot flag for the second starting port is ON (S20705: YES), the process proceeds to step S20722, and stop indicating the lottery result of the game round for the first starting port. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for out. After that, the determination processing for the first starting opening is ended. That is, when the variation of the first starting game round is started, if the second starting opening game round in which the jackpot is won is being executed, the stop symbol opening/closing execution mode of the first starting opening game round is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, in step S20705, if it is determined that the probability variation or normal jackpot flag for the second starting port is not ON (S20705: NO), the process proceeds to step S20706, and whether or not the specific processing flag is ON judge. The specific processing flag is turned ON when the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the game round executed before the game round for the first start port to be determined, and is turned on for the specific probability variable jackpot. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the special bonus process is executed. If it is determined in step S20706 that the specific process flag is ON (S20706: YES), the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, a process corresponding to the special bonus process is executed. After executing step S20707, the process advances to step S20708.

In step S20708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the special bonus process will start. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S20708, the process advances to step S20709.

In step S20709, the specific processing flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step S20710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20706 that the specific process flag is not ON (S20706: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S20710.

In step S20710, the allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the first start port (see FIG. 88(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step S20710, the process advances to step S20711.

In step S20711, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step S20710 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S20711, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (S20711: YES), the process proceeds to step S20712.

In step S20712, the probability variation jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing step S20712, the process proceeds to step S20713.

In step S20713, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot. In step S20713, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is a specific probability variation jackpot (step S20713: YES), the process proceeds to step S20714.

In step S20714, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S20715 and sets a specific definite variable jackpot command. The specific probability variable jackpot command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the game round for the first start hole to be determined. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S20715, the process advances to step S20716.

On the other hand, in step S20713, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not the specific probability variation jackpot (step S20713: NO), the process proceeds to step S20716.

In step S20716, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step S20716 is executed, the determination processing for the first start opening is terminated.

In step S20711, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (S20711: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S20717.

In step S20717, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing step S20717, the process advances to step S20718.

In step S20718, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal big win, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display part 37a in the current game round which is the normal big win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20718, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

In step S20704, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step S20702 or step S20703 is not a big hit (S20704: NO), the process proceeds to step S20719, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 With reference to the determination table, reach determination is performed as to whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step S20719 is executed when the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in step S20704 is not a big win. That is, in step S20719, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the win/fail determination is not a jackpot. After executing step S20719, the process advances to step S20720.

In step S20720, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step S20719 is reach occurrence. In step S20720, if it is determined that reach has occurred (S20720: YES), the process advances to step S20721 to turn on the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. After executing step S20721, the process proceeds to step S20722.

In step S20722, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn to be a loss, the first symbol display portion 37a is used for setting which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step S20722 is executed, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for first start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described. The variable time setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the change start process for the first start port (FIG. 96: S20504).

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variable time for the first start port. In step S20801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20802: YES), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20803, the process advances to step S20807 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first starting opening is terminated.

In step S20802, if it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game round is reach occurrence. Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON, and if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S20804: YES), the process proceeds to step S20805.

In step S20805, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20805, the process advances to step S20807 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first starting opening is terminated.

In step S20804, if it is determined that the reach determination result related to the current game round is not reach occurrence (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d By referring to the variable time table, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After executing step S20806, the process advances to step S20807 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first starting opening is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension numbers RaN increases. . However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of the first start suspension number RaN, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN is smaller. may

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Further, the variable time table for the probability variable jackpot and the variable time table for the normal jackpot may be individually set.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 95: S20404).

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the first fluctuation stopping process. In step S20901, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuating flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20901 that the first fluctuating flag is ON (S20901: YES), the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, a first fluctuation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the first variable time counter PTC1 for measuring the variable time of the game round for the first starting opening (the variable time of the first symbol display portion) is counted down. In this process, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down each time the thread in step S20902 is passed. That is, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down only when the thread of step S20902 is passed. After executing step S20902, the process advances to step S20903.

In step S20903, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variable time counter PTC1, which is counted down by the process of step S20902, has reached zero. In step S20903, when it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display portion has ended (S20903: YES), the process proceeds to step S20904, and the variation of the first symbol display portion is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S20905.

In step S20905, the first fluctuating flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S20906.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20903 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion has not ended (S20903: NO), the first variation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20901 that the first fluctuating flag is not ON (S20901: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S20906.

In step S20906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is the time during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S20906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, if the first symbol stop display time has already been set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol stop display times of all the first start opening game rounds are set to the same length of time. After executing step S20906, step S20907 is executed.

In step S20907, a first symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down every time the thread of step S20907 is passed. After executing step S20907, the process advances to step S20908.

In step S20908, it is determined whether or not the first symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has reached zero. In step S20908. When it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (S20908: YES), the process proceeds to step S20909. On the other hand, in step S20908. When it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (S20908: NO), the first fluctuation stop processing is ended as it is.

In step S20909, the first game running flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S20910.

In step S20910, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot type) or the small hit flag is ON. In step S20910, when it determines with a big hit flag or a small hit flag being ON (S20910:YES), it progresses to step S20911. On the other hand, in step S20910, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S20910: NO), the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated as it is.

In step S20911, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S20912 to set the open/close execution mode start command, and then the first fluctuation stop process is finished.

<Variation start processing for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described. The variation start process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 95: S20406) of the game round control process.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the second start suspension number RbN=0. If it is determined in step S21001 that the second start suspension number RbN is not 0 (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the second start suspension number RbN=0 (S21001: YES), the variation start processing for the second start opening is terminated.

In step S21002, a hold information shift process for the second start port is executed. In the hold information shift process for the second start port, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described later. After executing step S21002, the process proceeds to step S21003.

In step S21003, determination processing for the second start port is executed. In the determination process for the second start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, it is determined whether there is a jackpot or a small hit, and the jackpot type is distributed. Distribution judgment and reach judgment for judging presence/absence of reach occurrence are performed. The details of the determination process for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step S21003, the process proceeds to step S21004.

In step S21004, a variable time setting process for the second starting opening is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step S21004, the process advances to step S21005.

In step S21005, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the reach Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the variable time set in step S21004 are included. After executing step S21005, the process advances to step S21006.

In step S21006, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes 2R probability variable jackpot information, 2R normal jackpot information, small hit information, or off information.

The variation command and the second type command set in steps S21005 and S21006 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step S21006, the process proceeds to step S21007.

In step S21007, the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start variable display, and the process proceeds to step S21008 to turn on the second game running flag. After that, the flow advances to step S21009 to turn on the second fluctuating flag.

The second game in-execution flag is turned ON when the game round for the second start opening is started, and the fluctuation display in the second symbol display portion 37b becomes the stop display, which is the period during which the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the second symbol display stop time has ended. On the other hand, the second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game cycle for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b becomes a stop display. .

After executing step S21009, the process advances to step S21010.

In step S21010, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After step S21010 is executed, the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening is terminated.

<Holding information shift process for the second start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described. The hold information shift process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (FIG. 101: S21002).

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the second start port. In step S21101, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S21102.

In step S21102, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step S21103.

In step S21103, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S21103, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for the second start port>
Next, the determination processing for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the second start opening (FIG. 101: S21003).

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing determination processing for the second start port. In step S21201, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is normally turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the jackpot. In step S21201, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S21201:YES), it progresses to step S21202.

In step S21202, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the high-probability mode) for the second start port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 87(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step S21204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21201 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203.

In step S21203, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table (for the low-probability mode) for the second start port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 87(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step S21204.

In step S21204, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is a big hit. In step S21204, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, it is determined whether or not the variable probability or normal jackpot flag for the first starting port is ON. In step S21205, if it is determined that the variable probability or normal jackpot flag for the first starting port is ON (S21205: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218, and stop indicating the lottery result of the second starting port game round. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for out. After that, the determination processing for the second starting opening is terminated. That is, when the variation of the second starting port game time is started, if the first starting port game time in which the jackpot is won is being executed, the opening/closing execution mode for the stop symbol of the second starting port game time is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, in step S21205, when it is determined that the variable probability or normal jackpot flag for the first starting port is not ON (S21205: NO), the process proceeds to step S21206.

In step S21206, a distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 88(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step S21206, the process advances to step S21207.

In step S21207, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (jackpot type) in step S21206 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S21207, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (S21207: YES), the process proceeds to step S21208.

In step S21208, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing step S21208, the process advances to step S21209.

In step S21209, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the second symbol display part 37b in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step S21209 is executed, the determination processing for the second starting port is terminated.

In step S21207, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (S21207: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S21210.

In step S21210, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing step S21210, the process advances to step S21211.

In step S21211, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal big win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which is the normal big win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step S21211 is executed, the determination process for the second start opening is terminated.

In step S21204, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is not a big hit (S21204: NO), the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is a small hit. In step S21212, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213.

In step S21213, the small hit flag is turned ON. After executing step S21213, the process proceeds to step S21214.

In step S21214, stop symbol setting processing for a small hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the small win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game turn to be the small win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the small win stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small win is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store in the stop result address storage area. After step S21214 is executed, the process for determining the second starting port ends.

In step S21212, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is not a small hit (S21212: NO), the process proceeds to step S21215.

In step S21215, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referenced to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step S21215 is executed when the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in step S21204 is not a big win. That is, in step S21215, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the winning/failure determination is not a jackpot. After executing step S21215, the process proceeds to step S21216.

In step S21216, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step S21215 is reach occurrence. In step S21216, if it is determined that reach has occurred (S21216: YES), the process advances to step S21217 to turn on the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM64. After executing step S21217, the process proceeds to step S21218.

In step S21218, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn that is a loss, the second symbol display portion 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step S21218 is executed, the determination process for the second starting port is ended.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for second start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (FIG. 101: S21004).

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening. In step S21301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S21302.

In step S21302, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S21303, a low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed. The low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the second start-up game round when the second start-up game round is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. . Specifically, when the game for the second start opening is executed during the game progress state of step F101 in FIG. 90 and during the game progress state of step F105, the second start opening It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times for the game. The details of the low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S21303, the process advances to step S21307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21304.

In step S21304, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21304 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (S21304: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, high-probability high-frequency variation time information acquisition processing is executed. In the high-probability high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, when the game round for the second start opening is executed, This is a process of acquiring game time variation time information. Specifically, when the game for the second start opening is executed during the game progress state of step F110 in FIG. 90 and during the game progress state of step F113, the second start opening It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times for the game. The details of the high-probability high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step S21305, the process advances to step S21307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S21304: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306.

In step S21306, high-probability-low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. In the high-probability low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process, when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and the game round for the second start opening is executed, This is a process of acquiring game time variation time information. Specifically, when the game round for the second start opening is executed during the progress of the game in step F116 in FIG. be. The details of the high-probability low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step S21306, the process advances to step S21307.

In step S21307, the variable time information acquired in each process of step S21303, step S21305, and step S21306 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening is terminated.

<Low probability fluctuation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described. The low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21303) of the fluctuation time setting process for the second starting port.

As described above, the low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed in the second starting opening game round when the game is in progress at step F101 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F105. This is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the second start opening game round when the game is played. That is, the period in which the game round for the first start opening should be executed by hitting the left hand and entering the game ball into the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). Secondly, it is a process executed when the game ball is entered into the second starting hole 34 by hitting to the right and the game round for the second starting hole is executed. Since there is a possibility that an act of trying to get a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by executing a small win, in order to prevent such act, it is acquired in the low probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process The variable time information (variable time) is set to a relatively long time. Hereinafter, this low-probability fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the low probability variation time information acquisition process. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination relating to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, with reference to the fluctuation time table for the low-probability jackpot stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the low probability jackpot variable time table is a value between 5 and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21402, this low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S21401, when it is determined that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is not a big win (step S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step S21403, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step S21403: YES), the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, the fluctuation time table for occurrence of low probability reach stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time. In the present embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for occurrence of low probability reach is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21404, this low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S21403, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S21403: NO), the process proceeds to step S21405.

In step S21405, the variable time table for non-occurrence of low probability reach stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is acquired. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the low probability reach non-occurrence variable time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 7 minutes. . After executing step S21405, this low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

Thus, the variable time information acquired in the low probability variable time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time.

<Variation time information acquisition processing at high probability and high frequency>
Next, high-probability high-frequency variation time information acquisition processing will be described. The high-probability high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation time setting process for the second start port (FIG. 104: S21305).

As described above, the high-probability-high-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition processing is performed when the game is in progress at step F110 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F113. is executed, it is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game round for the second starting port. That is, the period in which the game round for the first start opening should be executed by hitting the left hand and entering the game ball into the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). Secondly, it is a process executed when the game ball is entered into the second starting hole 34 by hitting to the right and the game round for the second starting hole is executed. Since there is a possibility that an act of trying to obtain a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by executing a small prize winning is performed, in order to prevent such an act, it is acquired in the high probability high frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process The variable time information (variable time) to be received is set to a relatively long time. The average value of the variable times acquired in the high-probability high-frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a value shorter than the average value of the variable times acquired in the low-probability variable time information acquisition process. This is because the period during which the high-probability high-frequency variable time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player than the period during which the low-probability variable time information acquisition process is executed. The reason for this is that the unjustification of the player's act of obtaining a profit by winning a small prize by executing the game round for the second starting port is not so great as in the case of the certain time fluctuation time information acquisition processing. The high-probability-high-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described below.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing high-probability-high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, the variation time table for high-probability, high-frequency jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for high-probability, high-frequency jackpots is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 3 minutes. . After executing step S21502, this high-probability high-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21501, when it is determined that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is not a big win (step S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

In step S21503, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step S21503, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

In step S21504, by referring to the high-probability, high-frequency reach occurrence fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. . In the present embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for occurrence of reach at high probability and high frequency is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 3 minutes. be. After executing step S21504, this high probability high frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

In step S21503, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S21503: NO), the process proceeds to step S21505.

In step S21505, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence at high probability and high frequency stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. do. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for reach non-occurrence at high probability and high frequency is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variable time is 3 minutes. is. After executing step S21505, this high probability high frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing ends.

In this way, the variable time information acquired in the high probability high frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time, but the variable time information acquired in the high probability high frequency variable time information acquisition process The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the variation time acquired in the low probability variation time information acquisition process.

<High-probability low-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition processing>
Next, the high-probability-low-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described. The high-probability-low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21306) of the fluctuation time setting process for the second start port.

As described above, in the high-probability-low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process, when the game round for the second start opening is executed while the game is in progress in step F116 in FIG. It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times for the game. That is, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, the process is executed when the game ball is entered into the second starting hole 34 by hitting to the right and the game round for the second starting hole is executed. , the processing is in line with the flow of the original game. The variable time information (variable time) acquired in the high probability low frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, this high-probability-low-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the high-probability-low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination for the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when the small hit flag is ON (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21602. In addition, during the period of the special bonus processing in which this high-probability-low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed, the first start-up game round that won the jackpot is being executed at the start of the fluctuation of the second start-up game round. Therefore, the symbols of the second start opening game cycle are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols in which the opening/closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 103/S21205: NO). Therefore, during the period of the special bonus processing in which the high-probability-low-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition processing is executed, the game round for the second starting port does not win a jackpot, so unlike the processing of FIGS. 104 and 105 , There is no determination processing of whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In step S21602, with reference to the high-probability low-frequency small winning fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. . In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-probability-low-frequency small per fluctuation time table is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value of the values acquired as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. be. After executing step S21502, this high probability low frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is ended.

In step S21601, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a small hit (step S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21603.

In step S21603, with reference to the high probability low frequency non-small hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. do. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-probability-low-frequency non-low-performing fluctuation time table is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value of the values obtained as the fluctuation time is 2 seconds is. After executing step S21603, this high probability low frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

In this way, the variable time information (variable time) acquired in the high-probability-low-frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of second starting opening game rounds during the execution period of the special bonus process, that is, during the period during which the jackpot winning first starting opening game rounds are executed. As a result, the player can acquire a privilege during the execution of the first start opening game cycle by winning the small winnings a plurality of times.

<Second Fluctuation Stop Processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stopping process will be explained. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 95: S20407).

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the second fluctuation stopping process. In step S21701, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuating flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21701 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (S21701: YES), the process proceeds to step S21702.

In step S21702, a second fluctuation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the second variation time counter PTC2 for measuring the variation time of the second start opening game cycle (the variation time of the second symbol display section) is counted down. In this process, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down each time the thread of step S21702 is passed. That is, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down only when the thread is passed, instead of continuously counting down after passing the thread of step S21702. After executing step S21702, the process advances to step S21703.

In step S21703, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation time counter PTC2, which is counted down by the process of step S21702, has reached zero. In step S21703, when it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol display portion has ended (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704, and the variation of the second symbol display portion is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21705.

In step S21705, the second fluctuating flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S21706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion has not ended (S21703: NO), the second variation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21701 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (S21701: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21706.

In step S21706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is the time during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S21706, the second symbol stop display time is set. However, if the second symbol stop display time has already been set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second symbol stop display times of all the game rounds for the second start opening are set to the same length of time. After executing step S21706, step S21707 is executed.

In step S21707, a second symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down each time the thread of step S21707 is passed. After executing step S21707, the process advances to step S21708.

In step S21708, it is determined whether or not the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time has reached zero. In step S21708. When it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (S21708: YES), the process proceeds to step S21709. On the other hand, in step S21708. When it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (S21708: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing is ended as it is.

In step S21709, the second game running flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21710.

In step S21710, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot type) or the small hit flag is ON. In step S21710, when it determines with a big hit flag or a small hit flag being ON (S21710:YES), it progresses to step S21711. On the other hand, in step S21710, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S21710: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated as it is.

In step S21711, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S21712 to set the opening/closing execution mode start command, and then the second fluctuation stop process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 94: S20306).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S21801, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21801: NO), the flow advances to step S21802 to determine whether or not the opening/closing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21802: NO), the process advances to step S21803 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21803: NO), the flow advances to step S21804 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game cycle that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S21804 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S21804: YES), the process proceeds to step S21805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21804 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21804: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21805, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is the winning of the small hit. In step S21805, when it determines with not being a small hit (S21805:NO), it progresses to step S21806.

In step S21806, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In step S21805, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win. A high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to change the lottery mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to the low-probability mode. After executing step S21806, the process advances to step S21807.

In step S21807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step S21805, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win. A high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S21807, the process advances to step S21808.

In step S21808, a jackpot open/close execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started when the jackpot is won. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: step S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S21808, the process advances to step S21809.

In step S21809, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in the wake of a jackpot winning or in the wake of a small win. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of the big win or the small win. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 94 : step S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S21809, the flow advances to step S21810.

In step S21810, open/close scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step S21810, the process advances to step S21811.

In step S21811, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21811, the process advances to step S21812.

In step S21812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of big win, and information on the big win or small win that triggered execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21812, the process advances to step S21813 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is ON (S21803: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

In step S21814, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step S21814 that the opening period has ended (S21814: YES), the process advances to step S21815 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21816.

In step S21816, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the big hit type is displayed on the round display section 39 . After executing step S21816, the process advances to step S21817.

In step S21817, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21802, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21802: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21818, the process advances to step S21819.

In step S21819, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process has ended. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process has ended (S21819: YES), the process proceeds to step S21820. On the other hand, in step S21819, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S21819: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step S21820, the open/close process period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S21821.

In step S21821, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S21821, the process advances to step S21822.

In step S21822, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step S21822, the process advances to step S21823.

In step S21823, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period. After executing step S21823, the process advances to step S21824.

In step S21824, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is ON (S21801: YES), the process proceeds to step S21825.

In step S21825, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21822), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S21825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21825: YES), the process proceeds to step S21826.

In step S21826, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S21827 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21827, the process advances to step S21828 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the flow advances to step S21829 to set an opening/closing execution mode end command. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S21825, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21825: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening/closing scenario setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21810).

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing. In step S21901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In step S21901, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (S21901: YES), the process proceeds to step S21902.

In step S21902, a jackpot open/close scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which opening patterns of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game are set. After step S21902 is executed, the open/close scenario setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S21901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

In step S21903, the opening and closing scenario for small winning is set. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing scenario for a small win is set with an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing door 36b opens/closes once in the round game. After step S21903 is executed, the open/close scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21811).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S22001, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode of this time is a jackpot winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON.

In step S22001, when it is determined that the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the jackpot winning (S22001: YES), the process proceeds to step S22002.

In step S22002, 3000 (approximately 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S22001, if it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode of this time is not a jackpot winning, that is, if it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode of this time is a small hit (S22001: NO), step Proceed to S22003.

In step S22003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21818).

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S22101 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22102.

In step S22102, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step S22102 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

In step S22103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S22104.

In step S22104, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S22104, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S22102, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (S22102: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S22101 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22105.

In step S22105, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the big winning opening 36a. holds when If it is determined in step S22105 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S22105: YES), the process proceeds to step S22106.

In step S22106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step S22107.

In step S22107, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S22107, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S22105, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (S22105: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21827).

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S22201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, when any one of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

In step S22201, when it is determined that the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (S22201: YES), the process proceeds to step S22202, and the current trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability variable jackpot. Determine whether or not Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot.

In step S22202, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot (S22202: YES), the process proceeds to step S22203. On the other hand, in step S22202, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not the probability variable jackpot (S22202: NO), the process proceeds to step S22212.

In step S22203, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, out of the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and the 2R probability variable flag, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing step S22203, the process advances to step S22204.

At step S22204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step S22204, the process advances to step S22205.

In step S22205, it is determined whether or not the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step S22205, when it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (S22205: YES), the process proceeds to step S22209.

In step S22209, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, in step S22210, the specific process flag is turned ON. After executing step S22210, the flow advances to step S22211 to set a specific process command. The specific process command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that a specific process (special bonus process) will be executed. The specific process command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S22211, the process advances to step S22206.

On the other hand, in step S22205, when it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON (S22205: NO), the process proceeds to step S22206.

In step S22206, the high-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The high-probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step 06, go to step 07.

In step S22207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S22208 to set a high frequency support mode command. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is ended.

In step S22202, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variable jackpot (S22202: NO), the process proceeds to step S22212, and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step S22212, the process proceeds to step S22213.

In step S22213, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The low-probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step S22213, the process proceeds to step S22214.

In step S22214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22215, and 100 is set as the counter value in the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step S22215, the process proceeds to step S22216.

In step S22216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is ended.

In step S22201, if it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot (S22201: NO), that is, if the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small hit, step Proceeding to S22217, the small hit flag is turned OFF. After executing step S22217, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20307).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S22301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S22301 that the supported flag is not ON (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S22302.

In step S22302, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 44a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S22302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S22302: NO), the process proceeds to step S22303.

In step S22303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S22303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22303: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22303: YES), the process proceeds to step S22304.

In step S22304, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S22304 that it is time to end the variable display (S22304: YES), the process advances to step S22305 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S22304: NO), the process proceeds to step S22306.

In step S22306, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S22306, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S22306: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S22306: YES), the process proceeds to step S22307.

In step S22307, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S22308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S22307 (S22307: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S22308 (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22309 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S22310.

In step S22310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S22309 is support winning. In step S22310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S22310: YES), proceed to step S22311, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S22312. On the other hand, in step S22310, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S22310: NO), the process proceeds to step S22312 without executing the processing of step S22311.

In step S22312, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S22312 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S22312: YES), the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22312 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S22312: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S22313, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S22313, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S22313: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S22314 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S22315.

In step S22315, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S22315 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 94: S20302) of normal processing. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S22307 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S22307: YES), or if it is determined in step S22308 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S22308: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. In addition, at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step S22317.

In step S22317, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S22316 is support winning. In step S22317, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S22317: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S22317, if it is determined that the support is won (S22317: YES), the process advances to step S22318 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S22302 that the support winning flag is ON (S22302: YES), the process advances to step S22319 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S22319, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22319: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22319: YES), the process proceeds to step S22320.

In step S22320, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S22321 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S22301, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S22301: YES), the process advances to step S22322 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 44a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electric power opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 114: S22322).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step S22401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (S22401: YES), the process proceeds to step S22402.

In step S22402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22402: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, when the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S22402, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22402: YES), the process proceeds to step S22403 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 44a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S22403, the process advances to step S22404.

In step S22404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S22405 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S22405: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S22405: YES), the process advances to step S22406 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S22401 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S22401: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22407 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22407: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22407: YES), the process advances to step S22408 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary 44a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step S22409.

In step S22409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S22409: NO), the process advances to step S22410 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. do.

If it is determined in step S22410 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S22410: YES), the flow advances to step S22411 to set "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that the open/close execution mode is set (S22409: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S22410 (S22410: NO), the process proceeds to step S22412, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 116 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

B6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S23101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S23101, the process advances to step S23102.

In step S23102, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62 . The game state stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage processing will be described later. After executing step S23102, the process advances to step S23103.

In step S23103, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area for displaying the first starting opening effect image and the second starting opening effect image. Specifically, the first starting entrance effect image is displayed in the main display area MA and the second starting entrance effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the second starting entrance effect image is displayed in the main display area MA. A process for switching between displaying an image and displaying the effect image for the first starting entrance in the sub-display area SA is executed. The effect image for the first start opening includes the design for the first liquid crystal, and the effect image for the second start opening includes the design for the second liquid crystal. The details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step S23103, the process proceeds to step S23104.

In step S23104, special 1 game round effect processing is executed. The special 1 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start opening game round. The details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S23104, the process advances to step S23105.

In step S23105, a special 2 game round effect process is executed. The special 2 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start opening game round. The details of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S23105, the process advances to step S23106.

In step S23106, a special bonus effect setting process is executed. The special bonus effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed while the special bonus process is being executed. Details of the special bonus effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S23106, the process advances to step S23107.

In step S23107, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62 . For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2. After executing step S23107, the process advances to step S23108.

In step S23108, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes of steps S23103 to S23107. That is, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S23103 to S23107. After executing step S23108, the process advances to step S23109.

In step S23109, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the process from step S23103 to step S23107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S23103 to S23107 is output. After executing step S23109, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be described. The state processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 117: S23102).

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. In step S23201, it is determined whether or not a specific definite variable jackpot command has been received from the main side MPU62. A specific probability variable jackpot command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of a game cycle in which a specific probability variable jackpot is won. In step S23201, when it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command is received from the main side MPU 62 (S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202, and the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S23202, the process advances to step S23203.

On the other hand, in step S23201, when it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (S23201: NO), the process proceeds to step S23203.

In step S23203, it is determined whether or not a specific process command has been received from the main MPU62. The specific processing command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the specific probability variable jackpot win ends. If it is determined in step S23203 that a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: YES), the process advances to step S23204 to turn on the sound and light side specific processing flag. After executing step S23204, the process advances to step S23205.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that the specific process command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S23205.

In step S23205, it is determined whether or not a special bonus start command has been received from main MPU62. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the game round when the jackpot is won in the subsequent game round after winning the specific probability variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S23205 that the special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: YES), the process advances to step S23206 to turn off the sound and light side specific processing flag. After that, the process advances to step S23207 to turn on the special bonus start flag. After executing step S23207, the process advances to step S23208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S23208.

In step S23208, it is determined whether or not a jackpot open/close execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 . The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the winning of the jackpot. In step S23208, when it determines with having received the jackpot opening-and-closing execution mode command from main side MPU62 (S23208:YES), it progresses to step S23209.

In step S23209, it is determined whether or not the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23209: YES), the process proceeds to step S23210. In step S23210, the special bonus start flag is turned off. After that, the state storage processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23208 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: NO), and if it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23209 : NO), and this state storage processing ends.

<Display Mode Switching Processing>
Next, display mode switching processing will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23103).

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step S23301, it is determined whether or not a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23301 that the special bonus start command has been received (S23301: YES), the process proceeds to S23302. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. The special 2 main display flag displays the first starting opening effect image including the first liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and displays the second starting opening effect image including the second liquid crystal pattern. When displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, it is turned off, and the effect image for the second starting opening including the design for the second liquid crystal is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, This is a flag that is turned ON when the effect image for the first start opening including the pattern for the liquid crystal is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41 . In step S23302, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. As shown in FIG. 91, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, the game times for the second start opening are executed a plurality of times, and the lottery results in the game times for the second start opening are small wins for the player as well. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. After executing step S23302, the process advances to step S23303.

In step S 23303 , a special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . Upon receiving the special 2 main display command, the display control device 100 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second start entrance effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, The effect image for the first start opening including the pattern for liquid crystal is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41 . After executing step S23303, the process advances to step S23304.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S23301: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S23304.

In step S23304, it is determined whether or not a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received. In step S23304, when it determines with having received the jackpot opening-and-closing execution mode command (S23304:YES), it progresses to step S23305.

In step S23305, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23305 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23305: YES), the process advances to S23306 to turn the special 2 main display flag OFF. After that, the process advances to step S 23307 to transmit a special 1 main display command to the display control device 100 . That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the jackpot winning as an opportunity, the effect image for the first starting opening including the pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the effect image for the second liquid crystal is displayed. The display mode is such that the effect image for the second starting opening including the design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41 .

In the present embodiment, when a game is executed along a legitimate game flow, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting port is low, and the opening and closing execution mode is executed with the jackpot winning as a trigger. has a high probability of winning the jackpot in the game cycle for the first starting port. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed due to the winning of the jackpot, the first start opening effect image including the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 .

In step S23307, the special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as described above. Upon receiving the special 1 main display command, the display control device 100 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first start entrance effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, The effect image for the second start opening including the pattern for the liquid crystal is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. - 特許庁After executing step S23307, this display mode switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is not received in step S23304 (S23304: NO), and when it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON in step S23305 (S23305: NO) , the present display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game round effect processing>
Next, the special 1 game round effect processing will be described. The special 1 game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 117: S23104).

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the special 1 game round effect processing. In step S23401, it is determined whether or not a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S23401 that the special 1 variation command has been received (S23401: YES), the process proceeds to step S23402.

In step S23402, the special 1 variation command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S23403.

In step S23403, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23403: NO), the process advances to step S23404 to execute special 1 effect pattern setting processing for the main display area. The process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the details of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step S23402. The details of the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step S23404, the process advances to step S23406.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23403: YES), the process advances to step S23405 to execute the special 1 effect pattern setting process for the sub display area. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23402, the details of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

Here, the process of step S23405, that is, the process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed. That is, during the period during which the special bonus process is executed, the effect image for the first start opening is displayed in the sub-display area SA. As described with reference to FIG. 91, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, the second starter game round is executed with a high probability during the execution of the first starter game round in which the jackpot is won. A win is won and a round game of one round is executed. During the period in which the round game is being executed in association with the small win in the second starter game round, the measurement of the game time in the first starter game round is interrupted as an internal process of the main controller 60 . Therefore, the display time of the first starting entrance effect image displayed in the sub-display area SA during this period is variable, and cannot be specified at the time when the first starting entrance effect image is started to be displayed in the sub-display area SA. . Therefore, as the effect image for the first start opening to be displayed in the sub-display area SA, an image is set that does not give the player a sense of discomfort regardless of when the display ends. For example, an image in which the pattern for the first liquid crystal monotonously changes without telling a story, or an image in which a predetermined character repeats monotonous actions is set. By doing so, it is possible to display the effect image for the first start opening in the sub-display area SA whose display time is variable so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

After executing step S23405, the process advances to step S23406.

In step S23406, a liquid crystal pattern setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win, information corresponding to the stop result that the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). is set as information of the current liquid crystal pattern. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach is determined from the contents of the special 1 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the ready-to-win occurrence, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) does not materialize, and the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2). is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) is not established, and on the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the ready-to-win pattern combination is not established is set as the current liquid crystal pattern information. After executing step S23406, the process advances to step S23407.

In step S23407, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the special 1 variation command received this time, and information on the variation time and information on the liquid crystal pattern specified in step S23406. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23407, the process advances to step S23408.

In step S23408, a pending information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated so that the first pending number stored in the first pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S23408, the process advances to step S23409.

In step S23409, the special 1 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal pattern, the variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the first starting opening are set. After executing step S23409, the process advances to step S23410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23401 that the special 1 variation command has not been received, the process proceeds directly to step S23410.

In step S23410, special 1 game round effect execution processing is executed. The special 1 game round effect execution process is a process for controlling the start and end of variation of the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start opening game round. The details of the special 1 game round effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S23410, the process advances to step S23411.

In step S23411, special 1 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 1 variation time measurement process is a process for measuring the time for varying display of the liquid crystal pattern of the first start opening game cycle. The details of the special 1 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23411, the special 1 game round effect processing is terminated.

<Processing for Setting Special 1 Effect Pattern for Main Display Area>
Next, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be described. The process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23404) of the special 1 game round effect process.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23501, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is the game round in which a jackpot has been won. In step S23501, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is the big hit game round (S23501: YES), the process proceeds to step S23502.

In step S23502, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot has been won. In step S23502, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot has been won (S23502: YES), the process proceeds to step S23503.

In step S23503, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON. In step S23503, when it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variation jackpot flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is a 10R probability variation jackpot (step S23503: NO), the process proceeds to step S23504.

In step S23504, an effect pattern for variable probability big win is set as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

In step S23503, when it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON (S23503: YES), the process proceeds to step S23505. In step S23505, as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA, the effect pattern for the specific probability variable jackpot is set. After executing step S23505, the process advances to step S23506.

In step S23506, the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

In addition, the production pattern for the variable probability big hit set in step S23504 and the production pattern for the specific variable probability big hit set in step S23506 may be the same or similar production patterns. By doing so, it is made difficult to distinguish whether the current big win is a variable probability big win or a specific variable big win, and the expectation of which type of big win is given to the player. can be done.

In step S23502, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the probability variable jackpot has been won (S23502: NO), the process proceeds to step S23507.

In step S23507, a normal jackpot effect pattern is set as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

In step S23501, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the jackpot has been won (S23501: NO), the process proceeds to step S23508.

In step S23508, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound and light side specific processing flag is not ON (S23508: NO), the process proceeds to step S23509.

In step S23509, an effect pattern for exit is set as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound and light side specific processing flag is ON (S23508: YES), the process proceeds to step S23510.

In step S23510, a process of setting a performance pattern for a specific process for a failure is executed. This processing is executed when the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first starter game round and the first starter game round is executed after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the winning is completed. be. In other words, this process is a process of setting an effect pattern for failure in the first start opening game cycle executed during the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. In the present embodiment, as the performance pattern for the loss in the first starting game round executed during the period, a performance pattern suggesting that a special bonus process will be started when the next big win is won is used. adopt. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

<Special 1 game round effect execution processing>
Next, the special 1 game round effect execution processing will be described. The special 1 game round effect execution processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23410) of the special 1 game round effect processing.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing special 1 game round effect execution processing. In step S23601, it is determined whether or not the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. In step S23601, when it is determined that the special effect setting flag is ON (step S23601: YES), the process proceeds to step S23602. On the other hand, in step S23601, when it is determined that the special 1 effect setting flag is not ON (step S23601: NO), the special 1 game round effect execution processing is terminated as it is.

In step S23602, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S23602: NO), the process proceeds to step S23603.

In step S23603, the process of starting the variation of the pattern for the first liquid crystal is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing step S23603, the process advances to step S23604.

In step S23604, a first liquid crystal pattern variation start command is transmitted to display control device 100. FIG. Specifically, the information of the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game cycle is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command and transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern as the first start opening effect image on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step S23604, the process advances to step S23605.

In step S23605, the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is turned ON. After that, the special 1 game round effect execution processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S23602: YES), the process proceeds to step S23606.

In step S23606, it is determined whether or not the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is zero. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game round for the first starting port. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted in special 1 fluctuation time measurement processing to be described later. The end timing of the variable time in the mouth game is specified. If it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound/light fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (S23606: YES), the process proceeds to step S23607. On the other hand, in step S23606, when it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (S23606: NO), the special 1 game round effect execution processing is terminated as it is.

In step S23607, processing for ending the variation of the first liquid crystal pattern is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the pattern for the first liquid crystal (displaying the stop pattern) are set. After executing step S23603, the process advances to step S23608.

In step S23608, a first liquid crystal symbol variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 having received the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step S23608, the process advances to step S23609.

In step S23609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 fluctuation display start flag are turned off. After that, the special 1 game round effect execution processing is ended.

<Special 1 fluctuating time measurement process>
Next, the fluctuation time measurement process for special 1 will be described. The special 1 fluctuating time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 1 game spin effect process (FIG. 120: S23411).

The variation time measurement process for special 1 is a process of measuring the variation time of the first start opening game round. In addition, this process has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing special 1 fluctuation time measurement processing. In step S23701, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S23701: YES), the process proceeds to step S23702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S23701: NO), the special 1 fluctuation time measurement process is terminated.

In step S23702, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23702 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (S23702: YES), the process proceeds to step S23703.

In step S23703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S23706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23702 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (S23702: NO), the process proceeds to step S23704.

In step S23704, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S23704 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (S23704: YES), the process advances to step S23705 to turn off the special 1 count stop flag. After executing step S23705, the process advances to step S23706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23704 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (S23704: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S23706.

In step S23706, it is determined whether or not the special 1 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is not ON (S23706: NO), the process proceeds to step S23707.

In step S23707, the sound/light side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down every time the thread of step S23707 is passed. That is, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down only when the thread of step S23707 is passed. After step S23707 is executed, this special 1 fluctuation time measurement process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is ON (S23706: YES), this special 1 fluctuation time measurement process is terminated.

By executing such a process, the fluctuation time measurement process for this Special 1 can be achieved by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

In this way, by receiving from the main side MPU 62 the opening/closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode during the execution of the game round, the sound and light side MPU 92 interrupts measurement of the variation time of the game round, By receiving an opening/closing execution mode end command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode from the main side MPU 62 during the execution of , the interrupted measurement of the variation time of the game round in the sound/light side MPU 92 is resumed. When such processing is executed, for example, when the measurement of the variable time is repeatedly stopped and restarted during the period when the special bonus processing is being executed, the variable time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is also a possibility that a deviation from the fluctuation time measured by the light-side MPU 92 will occur. Therefore, for example, the opening/closing execution mode start command and the opening/closing execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62 may include information about the current value of the variable time measured by the main MPU 62 . The sound and light side MPU 92 performs measurement based on the information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main side MPU 62 included in the received opening/closing execution mode start command and opening/closing execution mode end command. A configuration that corrects the value of the fluctuation time that is present may be employed. In addition, if it is known that an error will occur in the fluctuation time measured by the sound and light side MPU 92 compared with the fluctuation time measured by the main side MPU 62, the value of the error or the value of the error may be specified, and when the sound and light side MPU 92 measures the fluctuation time, the error value may be corrected. By doing so, it is possible to precisely synchronize measurement of fluctuation time between the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 92 .

<Special 2 game round effect processing>
Next, the special 2 game round effect processing will be described. The special 2 game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 117: S23105).

FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the special 2 game round effect processing. In step S23801, it is determined whether or not a special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S23801 that the special 2 variation command has been received (S23801: YES), the process proceeds to step S23802.

In step S23802, the special 2 variation command received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of the small hit, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S23803.

In step S23803, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23803: NO), the process advances to step S23804 to execute setting processing of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. The process of setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area is a process of setting the details of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step S23802. The details of the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step S23804, the process advances to step S23806.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23803: YES), the process advances to step S23805 to execute special 2 effect pattern setting processing for the sub display area. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23802, the details of the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

After executing step S23805, the process advances to step S23806.

In step S23806, a liquid crystal pattern setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win, information corresponding to the stop result that the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). is set as information of the current liquid crystal pattern. Also, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach is determined from the contents of the special 2 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the ready-to-win occurrence, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) does not materialize, and the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2). is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L (L1 or L2) is not established, and on the effective line L (L1 or L2) Information corresponding to the stop result in which the ready-to-win pattern combination is not established is set as the current liquid crystal pattern information. After executing step S23806, the process advances to step S23807.

In step S23807, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the contents of the Special 2 variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information on the liquid crystal pattern specified in step S23806. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23807, the process advances to step S23808.

In step S23808, a hold information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated so that the second pending number stored in the second pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S23808, the process advances to step S23809.

In step S23809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal pattern, the variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the second starting opening are set. After executing step S23809, the process advances to step S23810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23801 that the special 2 variation command has not been received, the process proceeds directly to step S23810.

In step S23810, special 2 game round effect execution processing is executed. This is a process for controlling the start and end of variation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the second starting port game cycle. The details of the special 2 game round effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S23810, the process advances to step S23811.

In step S23811, special 2 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 2 variation time measurement process is a process for measuring the time for varying display of the liquid crystal pattern of the second start opening game cycle. The details of the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23811, the special 2 game round effect processing is terminated.

<Processing for Setting Special 2 Effect Pattern for Main Display Area>
Next, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area will be described. The process of setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game round effect process (FIG. 124: S23804).

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the special effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23901, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is the game round in which a jackpot has been won. In step S23901, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the jackpot has been won (S23901: YES), the process proceeds to step S23902.

In step S23902, the production patterns for big wins including variable probability big wins and normal big wins are set. After that, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area ends.

In step S23901, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the jackpot has been won (S23901: NO), the process proceeds to step S23903.

In step S23903, it is determined whether or not the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23903: NO), the process proceeds to step S23904.

In step S23904, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is a small winning game round. In step S23904, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which a small hit is won based on the received special 2 variation command (S23904: YES), the process proceeds to step S23905.

In step S23905, a production pattern for a small hit is set for a normal time (when not a special bonus time). After that, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area ends.

In step S23904, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the small winning game round based on the received special 2 variation command (S23904: NO), the process proceeds to step S23906.

In step S23906, the effect pattern for the loss is set for the normal time (when not the time of the special bonus). After that, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area ends.

If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23903: YES), the process proceeds to step S23907.

In step S23907, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is a small winning game round. In step S23907, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which a small hit is won based on the received special 2 variation command (S23907: YES), the process proceeds to step S23908.

In step S23908, the effect pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus is set. The setting method of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the state of the game at the time of execution of the process. The details of the processing for setting the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After step S23908 is executed, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area ends.

In step S23907, when it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the small winning game round based on the received special 2 variation command (S23907: NO), the process proceeds to step S23909.

In step S23909, the effect pattern for the loss at the time of the special bonus is set. After that, the processing for setting the special effect pattern 2 for the main display area ends.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the process of setting the effect pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus in step S23908.

In the process of setting the effect pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus, the effect pattern is set by referring to the effect pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) in which the fluctuation time of the game round to be processed and the effect pattern are associated with each other. do. FIG. 126 is a correspondence table in which effect pattern table data to be referred to is associated with each game state during execution of the effect pattern setting process for a small win at the time of a special bonus.

As shown in the figure, the type of the jackpot in the first starting game round that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the jackpot type in the first starting game round at time T4 in FIG. 91), and the jackpot It is used to set the effect of the second start-up game round to be executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed for each remaining time RT after the start of the fluctuation of the first start-up game round. Effect pattern table data is associated and set.

For example, when the jackpot type of the first starting game time that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the jackpot type of the first starting game time at time T4 in FIG. 91) is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot and when the remaining time RT of the variation time of the first starting opening game round at the timing of setting the second starting opening game round is 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, the production pattern table By referring to the data TB2, the effect pattern of the game round for the second start opening that has resulted in a small win is determined.

As shown in the figure, each effect pattern table data is set in association with the effect pattern for each variation time UT of the game round for the second start opening, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is selected and set. .

In this way, by determining the method of setting the effect pattern for the second starting game round at the time of the special bonus according to the state of the game when setting the effect pattern, various suggestive effects can be provided to the player. can be executed.

For example, when the remaining time RT of the first start opening game cycle during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed becomes short, an effect is executed to suggest that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short, A feeling of impatience can be imparted. In addition, when the remaining time RT of the game round for the first starting port is sufficient, an effect is executed to suggest that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short, and then the remaining time of the special bonus process is sufficiently left. By executing an effect suggesting that, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, by changing the setting method of the production pattern for each type of the jackpot in the first start game round that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the type of the jackpot in the first start game round is suggested. You can perform a production to do.

<Special 2 game round effect execution processing>
Next, the special 2 game round effect execution processing will be described. The special 2 game round effect execution processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S23810) of the special 2 game round effect processing.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing special 2 game round effect execution processing. In step S24001, it is determined whether or not the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. In step S24001, when it is determined that the special effect setting flag is ON (step S24001: YES), the process proceeds to step S24002. On the other hand, in step S24001, when it is determined that the special 2 effect setting flag is not ON (step S24001: NO), the special 2 game round effect execution processing is terminated as it is.

In step S24002, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24002: NO), the process proceeds to step S24003.

In step S24003, the process of starting the variation of the pattern for the second liquid crystal is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing step S24003, the process proceeds to step S24004.

In step S24004, a second liquid crystal pattern variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. Specifically, the information of the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game cycle is set in the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command and transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command on the liquid crystal display device 41 as the second start opening effect image. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step S24004, the process advances to step S24005.

In step S24005, the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is turned ON. After that, the special 1 game round effect execution processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24002: YES), the process proceeds to step S24006.

In step S24006, it is determined whether or not the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is zero. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game cycle for the second starting port. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted in special 2 fluctuation time measurement processing to be described later, and by recognizing the timing when the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0, the sound and light side MPU 92 performs the second start. The end timing of the variable time in the mouth game is specified. If it is determined in step S24006 that the value of the sound/light fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (S24006: YES), the process proceeds to step S24007. On the other hand, in step S24006, when it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (S24006: NO), the special 2 game round effect execution processing is terminated as it is.

In step S24007, the process of ending the variation of the pattern for the second liquid crystal is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the pattern for the second liquid crystal (displaying the stop pattern) are set. After executing step S24003, the process proceeds to step S24008.

In step S24008, a second liquid crystal pattern variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 having received the command stops the second liquid crystal pattern displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal pattern variation start command. After executing step S24008, the process advances to step S24009.

In step S24009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 fluctuation display start flag are turned off. After that, the special 2 game round effect execution processing is terminated.

<Special 2 fluctuating time measurement processing>
Next, the fluctuation time measurement processing for Special 2 will be described. The special 2 fluctuating time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game spin production process (FIG. 124: S23811).

The variation time measurement process for this special 2 is a process of measuring the variation time of the game round for the second start opening. In addition, this process has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special 2 fluctuation time measurement process. In step S24101, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24101: YES), the process proceeds to step S24102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24101: NO), the special 2 fluctuation time measurement process is terminated.

In step S24102, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24102 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (S24102: YES), the process proceeds to step S24103.

In step S24103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S24106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24102 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (S24102: NO), the process proceeds to step S24104.

In step S24104, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S24104 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (S24104: YES), the process advances to step S24105 to turn off the special 2 count stop flag. After executing step S24105, the process advances to step S24106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24104 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (S24104: NO), the process proceeds to step S24106.

In step S24106, it is determined whether or not the special 2 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is not ON (S24106: NO), the process proceeds to step S24107.

In step S24107, the sound/light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down every time the thread of step S24107 is passed. That is, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down only when the thread of step S24107 is passed. After executing step S24107, this special 2 variation time measurement process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (S24106: YES), this special 2 variation time measurement process is terminated.

By executing such a process, the fluctuation time measurement process for this special 2 is provided with the function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

<Special bonus effect setting process>
Next, the special bonus effect setting process will be described. The special bonus effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23106).

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing special bonus effect setting processing. In step S24201, it is determined whether or not a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24201 that the special bonus start command has been received (S24201: YES), the process proceeds to step S24202.

In step S24202, a special bonus effect is set. The special bonus effect is the display of images, sound output, and lamps for the period of the special bonus process in areas other than the main display area MA and the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. This is a setting process for executing the lighting of the . After executing step S24202, this special bonus effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24201 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S24201: NO), this special bonus effect setting process is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S24301, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S24302.

In step S24302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S24401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S24501, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 131) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S24501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the pattern for the liquid crystal set by the sound emission control device 90, and generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S24502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S24501), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S24503.

In step S24503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S24502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S24504.

In step S24504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S24503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S24505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a privilege during the execution of the game round for the first starting slot in which the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of anticipation about the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the game round in which the jackpot is won is completed, the game round in which the jackpot is won is also executed. It can also give you a sense of expectation.

In addition, even if a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round, the special bonus process may or may not be executed during the execution of the game round, so that the jackpot is won. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency to the player as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed when the game cycle for the first starting port is started.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, a special bonus is triggered by winning a small win in the second start-up game round during the execution of the first start-up game round in which a big win is won. Since the privilege (1R round game) is given, even if a big win is won in the first start-up game round, the second start-up game round is executed and a small win is made. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation by allowing the winner to win the prize.

Further, after the end of the first start-up game cycle in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the winning of the big win in the first start-up game cycle, so that the game can be played with a greater sense of expectation. can be given to a person.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of execution times of the second starting port game times that can be executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed is the time period during which the first starting port game times that are being executed during the period are executed. depends on That is, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as a special bonus is determined by the time during which the first starting game cycle that is being executed during the period is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game round for the first starting port being executed will continue for a longer period of time while the special bonus process is being executed. In addition, as the end of the game round for the first start gate approaches, there is a desire to obtain as many benefits as a special bonus, that is, the expectation that the game round for the second start gate will be executed to win as many small prizes as possible. It is possible to impart a sense of excitement and frustration related to the end time of the game round for the first starting opening, and to impart an intonation to the emotions of the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting slot game round in which the special bonus process is executed, so the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

Further, whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting game round in which the winning lottery is won is determined prior to the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed. It is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first start-up game round that is executed prior to the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is executed and in which the jackpot is won is specified. In the case of the probability variable jackpot, a special bonus process is executed in the game round for the first starting port in which the jackpot is won after that. In other words, it is possible to specify in advance before the execution of the special bonus process that the special bonus process will be executed when a big win is won in the next game round for the first starting port. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first start-up game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot is won, a notice (suggestion) is made that a special bonus process will be executed if a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round next time. A special bonus process is performed during the period from the execution of the first starting game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot is won to the start of the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed. It is possible to execute an effect that foretells (suggests) that it will be executed. Other conditions for switching the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode when winning a specific probability variable jackpot in the first start-up game round and then winning a jackpot in the first start-up game round can be one of In this way, in the first start-up game round in which the winning lottery is won, the determination of whether or not to execute the special bonus process is made prior to the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is executed. By making a determination based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting game round that has been executed and won a jackpot, it is possible to execute various processes for dealing with the execution of the special bonus process.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the setting method of the variation time of the game round for the second start opening between the period during which the special bonus process is executed and the other period. More specifically, the average value of the variation times of the second starting game rounds set in the period during which the special bonus process is executed is the average value of the variation times of the second starting opening game rounds set in other periods. shorter than average. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be made advantageous to the player. Further, when such processing is executed, there is a risk that the player will be overly advantageous. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the jackpot type of the first starting game times executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, Decide the performance pattern. Therefore, the player can indirectly guess the lottery result (jackpot type) of the first start-up game round through the effect of the second start-up game round. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the first start-up game round by using the effect executed in the second start-up game round. In addition, based on the lottery mode (high-probability mode or low-probability mode) after the end of the game round for the first start opening, which is executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed, it is executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed. A performance pattern of the second start opening game cycle to be played is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the lottery mode after the end of the first start-up game round by using the effect executed in the second start-up game round.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, regarding the setting of the effect of the second starting game round executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the first starting game at the timing of setting the effect Based on the elapsed time of the round, the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port is set. Therefore, the elapsed time from the execution of the first starting game round and the first starting opening game round are given to the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second starting opening game round. It is possible to guess the remaining time until the end of the second starting gate special information game round and indirectly give a sense of expectation for the first starting gate special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second starting gate special information game round. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, the process of setting the effect pattern for the second starting game round based on the elapsed time of the first starting game round, the first It is a condition that the game round for the starting opening wins the jackpot. Therefore, if the second start-up game round is executed while the first start-up game round is being executed, whether or not the effect of the second start-up game round is based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game round. By making the player guess whether or not the game round for the first starting port wins a jackpot, it can be guessed. In other words, it is possible to impart a sense of expectation regarding the success or failure of the winning lottery for the first start gate game round through the performance of the second start gate game turn. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, the process of setting the effect pattern for the second starting game round based on the elapsed time of the first starting game round, the first It is a condition that the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first start-up game round executed before the start-up game round. Therefore, if the second start-up game round is executed while the first start-up game round is being executed, whether or not the effect of the second start-up game round is based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game round. By making the player guess whether or not the specific probability variable jackpot was won in the first start-up game round that was executed prior to the first start-up game round, that is, the number during the execution It is possible to make the player guess whether or not the special bonus process will be executed in the game round for 1 starting port, and to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the first liquid crystal symbol according to the state in which the first start-up game round is executed, even if the jackpot is won in the first start-up game round. The process of exchanging the display area to be displayed and the display area to display the pattern for the second liquid crystal may or may not be executed. Specifically, in the state where the specific probability variable jackpot has been won before the first starter game round in which the jackpot has been won is executed, the first starter game round in which the jackpot has been won is started. Triggered by this, a process of exchanging the display areas for displaying the pattern for the first liquid crystal and the pattern for the second liquid crystal is performed. On the other hand, in a state where a jackpot other than the specific probability variable jackpot has been won prior to the execution of the first starter game round in which the jackpot has been won, the first starter game round in which the jackpot has been won is started. With this as a trigger, the process of exchanging the display areas for displaying the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern is not performed. Therefore, by making the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been executed, whether the state in which the game round for the first start opening was executed was after the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot was won, Alternatively, it is possible to guess whether it is after a game round in which a jackpot other than a specific probability variable jackpot has been won. As a result, by making the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been executed, the player can guess whether or not the special bonus process will be executed, and a great sense of anticipation can be imparted. In addition, by executing an effect using whether or not the display area can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed.

B6. Modified example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

B6-1. Variant 1:
In the above-described second embodiment, a lottery is made at the start of the first start-up game round for executing the special bonus process to determine whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won. Therefore, it may be performed, or it may be performed based on the jackpot type in the game round for the first start opening. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot has been won is made by the first start-up game round in which the jackpot has been won (after the first start-up game round). It is determined based on whether or not the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first starter game round (preceding execution first starter game round) that wins the jackpot executed earlier than the starter game round). However, in this modified example, the jackpot type in the first start-up game round is not referred to, and the judgment by the jackpot type in the game round for the first start-up slot in the post-execution, the game round for the first start-up slot in the post-execution Judgment will be made by lottery at the start of the By doing so, there is no need to execute a process (for example, storing by means of a flag) for storing the jackpot type of the game for the first start opening that was executed earlier and the jackpot was won, and the processing load can be reduced. can be planned.

In addition, it is possible to set a variable probability jackpot and a normal jackpot as types of jackpot types, and if a variable probability jackpot is won in the first start-up game round, then the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot in the first start-up game round A configuration may be adopted in which the special bonus process is executed at the timing of winning the prize. By doing so, the setting of the jackpot type such as the specific probability variable jackpot and the setting of the specific probability variable jackpot flag are unnecessary, and the processing can be simplified.

In addition, as a jackpot type, a high-frequency support mode is provided, and the high-frequency support mode set in the game cycle executed after the jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode ends is a specific high-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which a special bonus process is executed when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. Specifically, as the jackpot types, the 10R probability variable jackpot A in which the high frequency support mode A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern A is executed, and the high frequency in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B A configuration is adopted in which a 10R probability variable jackpot B in which the support mode B is executed can be set. Then, for example, when the jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting port during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a special bonus process is executed.

More specifically, a high frequency support mode flag is prepared according to the type of high frequency support mode. Then, when the 10R probability variable jackpot B is won, the transition processing at the end of the ending period executed at the end of the round game (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot: Fig. 113) Corresponds to high frequency support mode B A high-frequency support mode flag (hereinafter referred to as a high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned ON. After that, during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B in which the opening pattern of the electric accessary 44a is the pattern B, the game round for the first start opening is executed, and it is judged that the jackpot is won by judging whether or not the jackpot is won. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON, and if it is determined that the flag is ON, it is determined to execute the special bonus process. That is, the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is turned OFF at the start of the game cycle for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won. In addition, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON after determining whether or not the jackpot has been won in the game round for the first start opening. A configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the frequency support mode flag is ON, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the game round for the first start opening is successful. Various forms of processing can be employed as long as the processing allows recognition of the winning of a jackpot in the game round for one starting port.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the specific probability variable jackpot was won in the previous game round without using the specific processing flag in the game round after winning the specific probability variable jackpot. . That is, by providing multiple types of high-frequency support modes and determining whether the high-frequency support mode is a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, whether it is high-frequency support mode B), It can be recognized that the specific probability variable jackpot was won in the previous game round.

Also, when such a configuration is employed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of high-frequency support mode to be executed. Then, when a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example) is being executed, at the start of the first start opening game round, the player is asked to It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation about the result of winning the jackpot. That is, when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode, the special bonus process is executed. Therefore, when the specific high-frequency support mode is not executed. It is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation in comparison with the success or failure of the jackpot of the game round for the first starting port to be executed.

Furthermore, during the execution of a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example), if a jackpot is won in the game round for the first start opening and special bonus processing is executed, high-frequency support The mode flag (high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned OFF, and the support mode is switched. Specifically, it switches to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the support mode will switch during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the game round for the first start opening during execution of a specific high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode B in the above example) and a special bonus process is executed, the second start The setting method of the variation time of the mouth game is switched (see FIGS. 91 and 104). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation whether or not the setting method of the variation time of the game round for the second start opening will be switched during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode.

Only one kind of high-frequency support mode can be executed, and when a jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting port during execution of the high-frequency support mode, a special bonus process is executed. good too. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round during execution of the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is switched to a low frequency at the start of the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is achieved. Switch to support mode. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the first starter game round during execution of the high-frequency support mode, the second starter game round changes at the start of the first starter game round that is the jackpot. Switch the time setting method. Such a configuration may be adopted.

B6-2. Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is adopted in which the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting game round. A configuration may be adopted in which the process of switching from the frequent support mode to the high frequency support mode is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged during the execution of the game round for the first starting port.

B6-3. Variant 3:
In the above embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the variation of the first symbol in the first starting game round in which the jackpot is won. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of the first symbol is finished and the first symbol is stopped. That is, in the period from the time when the variation of the first symbol of the first start opening game round in which the jackpot was won stops to the end of the display of the stopped first symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the stop display period) , a configuration for executing a special bonus process may be employed. Specifically, at the start of the stop display period, the setting method for the variation time of the second start opening game cycle is changed, and a relatively long time (5 to 10 minutes) is set as the variation time, Switch to a setting method in which a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds) is set. Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Also, the stop display period for executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time of 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing so, the configuration of the modification can be realized.

B6-4. Variant 4:
In the above embodiment, when a variable probability jackpot is won, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode from the end of the opening and closing execution mode executed after the winning game round, and the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. is maintained, but is not limited to such a configuration, and as a modification, when winning a probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode is a high probability mode from the end of the opening and closing execution mode executed after the winning game round Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode is shifted to the low-probability mode after a predetermined number of games have been played. That is, it is a configuration in which the number of times the game is played in the high-probability mode is limited. By doing so, for example, when a specific probability variable jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won after that, a special bonus process is executed. Since the number of times is limited, the special bonus process is not executed unless a big win is won before the limited number of game times are executed. Therefore, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency and impatience to the player during the period in which the game is executed in the high probability mode after winning the specific probability variable jackpot, and to impart an intonation to the player's emotions.

B6-5. Variant 5:
In the above embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is executed after winning the jackpot of any jackpot type in the game round for the first start opening. Therefore, during the period of execution of the high-frequency support mode, by executing an effect suggesting the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode, the player can It can give you a sense of expectation. For example, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is executed, if an effect is executed that suggests that the type of the winning jackpot is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the player who recognizes the effect On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the special bonus process may start when the next big win is won.

Also, during the period of execution of the high-frequency support mode, the player guesses whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode is the 10R specific probability variable jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot. When the effect to cause is executed, the player who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game round will move to the support mode, and the special bonus process will start. It is difficult to determine whether it is caused by the fact that the game is played in the high-frequency support mode or by the end of the number of games (100 times) executed in the high-frequency support mode. can.

B6-6. Modification 6:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot was won earlier is the specific probability variable jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot was won in the first start-up game round executed later. As a trigger, the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting port, but other configurations may be adopted without being limited to such a configuration. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot was previously won, winning the jackpot in the executed first start-up game round, or winning the jackpot of a specific jackpot type. Taking this as an opportunity, a configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting port. By doing so, it is possible to give the player, who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has been switched to the low-frequency support mode, a sense of expectation for the subsequent progress of the game.

B6-7. Variant 7:
In the above embodiment, the process at the start of the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won depends on whether or not the jackpot type in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won first is a specific probability variable jackpot. It is determined whether or not the special bonus process is started at the start of the game round for the first starting port in which the jackpot is won. Based on this, other configurations may be employed as long as the configuration determines the processing at the start of the game round in which the jackpot is won later. For example, if the jackpot type in the game round in which the jackpot was won first is the probability variable jackpot, at the start of the game round in which the jackpot is won later, a specific effect is started, or the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode. Various configurations such as a configuration for switching to a mode, a configuration for switching a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing the setting method of the variation time of game rounds may be adopted.

B6-8. Modification 8:
In the present embodiment, with the start of the special bonus process as a trigger, the fluctuation time of the game round for the second start opening is high even though the average value of the fluctuation time set is shorter than the other periods. Although the frequency support mode was switched to low frequency support, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the high frequency support mode is switched despite the fact that the average value of the game round fluctuation time set based on a specific trigger is shortened. Other configurations may be employed as long as they are configured to switch to low-frequency support. For example, when switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the method of setting the fluctuation time is switched so that the average value of the fluctuation time of the set game round is shortened, and the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency A configuration for switching to support may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

B6-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first starting port game round, especially when a jackpot is won in the first starting port game round and a special bonus process is executed, the first starting port The second start-up game round executed during the period in which the second game round is executed is an effect executed in the second start-up game round with respect to the second start-up game round executed in another period. Although the method of determining is different, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the second start-up game executed during the period from the start to the end of one first start-up game Another configuration may be adopted as long as the effect to be executed in a round is determined based on the pattern (lottery result) corresponding to the first start opening game round. For example, depending on whether the lottery result corresponding to the one first start-up game round is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, the one first start-up game round is started and then terminated. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect (or the setting method of the effect) executed in the second start opening game cycle executed during the period until the game is executed is different. Even in this way, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation for the first start-up game round by using the effect executed in the second start-up game round.

B6-10. Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a privilege is given to the player in the form of a special bonus process during the period in which the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won is being executed. Any other configuration may be adopted as long as it is a configuration in which a privilege is given to the player during the period in which the game round being played is being executed. For example, a configuration may be employed in which the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode during execution of the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won, and a privilege is given to the player. In addition, the pachinko machine in the present embodiment was a so-called simultaneous variation machine pachinko machine in which the game round for the first start port and the game round for the second start port were executed in parallel. A pachinko machine in which the game round and the game round for the second starting port are exclusively executed may be employed. In this case, the low frequency support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode during the execution of the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won, and the game ball is easily entered into the second start opening. A configuration may be adopted in which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the second start hole.

B6-11. Modification 11:
In the above embodiment, the elapsed time information, which is information about the elapsed time from the start of the first starting game round to a predetermined timing, or the information regarding the remaining time of the first starting opening game round (remaining time RT ), and based on the elapsed time information, an effect corresponding to the second starting opening game round to be executed during the period in which the first starting opening game round for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired is being executed. Any other configuration may be adopted as long as it is a configuration for setting the . For example, based on the remaining time of the first start-up game round, information corresponding to the remaining time in the second start-up game round executed during the period in which the first start-up game round is executed is displayed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting that the remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time of the game for the first starting port is executed based on the actual remaining time. Even in this way, the elapsed time from the execution of the first start-up game round and the first start-up game round are given to the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second start-up game round. It is possible to guess the remaining time until the end of the game round and indirectly give the expectation for the first starting opening game round through the performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round.

B6-12. Variant 12:
In the above embodiment, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, the variation of the symbols in the first starting game round in which the jackpot is won is changed to the specific small win in the second starting opening game round. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the operation is stopped when the operation is performed. For example, a configuration is adopted in which two kinds of small wins, that is, a first small win and a second small win, are set in the success/failure table for the second starting port (see FIG. 87). During the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, while the symbols of the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot is won are changing, the second starting opening opening game round is executed, and the lottery result is the first. In the case of two small hits, the fluctuation of the first start opening game cycle is continued without stopping, as in the above-described embodiment. On the other hand, when the pattern of the first starting opening game round in which the big win is won is changing, the second starting opening opening game round is executed, and when the lottery result is the first small winning, the second starting opening game round is executed. At the timing when the variation of the pattern of the game cycle for the starting port is stopped, the variation of the pattern of the game cycle for the first starting port is also stopped. At this time, the symbol of the first starting slot game cycle is stopped with a symbol indicating a loss. That is, the game round for the first starting port ends, and the special bonus process ends. Also, at this time, since the symbol of the first starting port game round stops with a symbol indicating a loss, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed after the end of the first starting port game round, and the first opening/closing execution mode is not executed as a special bonus process. The support mode after the game round for one starting port ends is also the low-frequency support mode.

In other words, by adopting such a configuration, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the period in which the symbols of the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won are changing, the second start-up game is played. When the lottery result of the round is the first small win, the privilege given to the player is reduced compared to the case where the lottery result is not the first small win. Therefore, even during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, even when the pattern of the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot is won is fluctuating, the player is given a sense of urgency and anticipation. It can be given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this modification, as in the above embodiment, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the period in which the jackpot is won, the pattern of the game round for the first start opening is changing. It is possible to employ a configuration in which the lottery result of the mouth game does not result in a big win.

B6-13. Variant 13:
In the above-described embodiment, when the second start-up game round is executed while the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won is changing, the second start-up game round wins the jackpot. Even though it is set to stop with a design that indicates that you have not won the jackpot, if you have won a small prize, it will be a pattern that indicates that you have won a small prize. Although it was configured to stop, only when a specific small win was won, it stopped with a pattern indicating that the said small win was won, and even if other small wins were won, the small win was won. A configuration may be adopted in which the game is set to stop at a symbol indicating that the game has not been won.

B6-14. Variant 14:
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round in a state in which a specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first start-up game round that was previously won, that is, a special bonus process is executed. In this case, the configuration in which the display areas in which the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are displayed is switched is adopted, but other configurations may be adopted without being limited to such a configuration. For example, when a game cycle in which a big win is won is executed in the state of the high-probability mode, a configuration may be employed in which the display areas in which the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are displayed are switched. A configuration may be adopted in which the display areas for displaying the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal are switched when a game round for winning a jackpot is executed in the state of the frequency support mode. In addition, a display in which the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern are displayed when a game round in which a big win is won is executed in a state in which a specific small win was won in the previously executed game round. A configuration in which the regions are switched may be adopted. In addition, the target of the pattern whose display area is switched is not limited to the pattern for the first liquid crystal and the pattern for the second liquid crystal. It may be a pattern for an open lottery. Even in this way, by making the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been executed, the player can make various guesses and give the player a sense of anticipation.

In addition, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starter game round before winning the jackpot, if a jackpot is won in each first starter game round, the main win is based on the jackpot type in that game round. A configuration may be adopted in which the performance images displayed in the display area MA and the sub-display area SA are exchanged. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are exchanged at the start of a game round. Also, these configurations may be combined. By combining them, it is possible to prompt the player, who recognizes the switching of the performance images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA, to make various guesses in the game cycle that has been started, and to give them a sense of expectation.

B6-15. Modification 15:
In the above embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be granted as benefits, that is, the executable number of times of the second start opening game that can win the small win is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first start-up game cycle corresponding to the special bonus process, but the upper limit of the amount of benefits is the variation of the game cycle that satisfies a specific condition. Other configurations may be employed as determined by the length of time. For example, the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second starting hole during execution of the first starting hole game time is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting hole game time. A configuration that Even in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of wanting to obtain as many benefits as possible as the end of the game round approaches, and a feeling of impatience regarding the timing of the end of the game round. Emotions can be given intonation.

B6-16. Variant 16:
In the above-described embodiment, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off from ON at the start of the first starting port game round in which the jackpot is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the fall lottery is executed before the winning lottery is executed. Here, the falling lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to switch to the low probability mode when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this modification, the falling lottery is executed before the winning lottery in the game round. When the game round has already been executed 100 times or more in the high-frequency support mode, if the falling lottery is won in the game round for the first starting port, the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode at the start of the game round. As the mode shifts to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF.

By adopting such a configuration, if the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first starting game time executed first, and if the big win is won in the first starting game time next time, the special bonus processing is executed. and in a state in which 100 or more game rounds have already been executed in the high-frequency support mode, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the same time as the game round for the first starting port is started. In the case of shifting to the support mode, the player is asked whether the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode due to the start of the special bonus process after winning the jackpot, or the player has fallen. A player can guess whether the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode due to the shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode by winning the lottery, and the player has a great sense of urgency. can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B6-17. Variant 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round, an effect that suggests information about the type of the jackpot in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot was previously won in the game round is provided. may be executed. That is, the effect to be executed in the first starting game round in which the jackpot is won is determined based on the type of jackpot in the first starting game round in which the jackpot is won prior to the first starting game round. do.

For example, when a jackpot is won in the first start-up game round, an effect is executed to suggest that the type of the jackpot in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot was won immediately before was a specific variable jackpot. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the currently executed first starting game round is the game round for which the special bonus processing is to be executed, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In addition, when the type of the jackpot in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won first is a specific variable jackpot, the jackpot is won first in the first start-up game round in which the jackpot is won later. An effect may be executed to make the player guess whether the type of the jackpot in the first starting opening game round was the specific probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot. By executing such a performance, the player is made to guess whether or not the game round for the first starting port currently being executed is the game round for which the special bonus process is to be executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

B6-18. Variant 18:
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the setting method of the variation time of the game cycle for the second starting port is switched at the start of the special bonus process. Specifically, from the high-probability high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process (Fig. 104: S21305), the process is transferred to the high-probability low-frequency fluctuation time acquisition process (Fig. 104: S21306), which is executed as a special bonus process. The average value of the variation time set for the second start-up game times during the period in which the first start-up game time is executed is equal to the second start-up game time before the special bonus process is executed. In addition, in the period during which the first start-up game round executed as a special bonus process is executed, the second start-up game round is executed. A configuration having a plurality of types of setting methods for the fluctuation time of may be employed.

Specifically, in the high-probability low-frequency fluctuation time acquisition process (see FIG. 107), a plurality of types of fluctuation time tables for high-probability low-frequency small hits selected when a small hit is provided. Each high-probability low-frequency small winning variation time table differs from each other in the average value of the variation time set for the second start opening game round. For example, it has a variation time table for small hits at the first high probability and low frequency, a variation time table for small hits at the second high probability and low frequency, and a variation time table for small hits at the third high probability and low frequency. The fluctuation time table for the small hit at the first high probability and low frequency has a shorter average value of the fluctuation time set for the game round for the second start port than the fluctuation time table for the small hit at the second high probability and low frequency, The second high-probability low frequency small winning variation time table has a shorter average value of the variation time set for the second starting opening game cycle than the third high probability low frequency small winning variation time table. Then, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the second start-up game round during the period in which the first start-up game round executed as the special bonus process is executed, the second start-up game round will be the small win. The variable time table for setting the variable time in the game round for the second starting port includes the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting port corresponding to the special bonus process, the variation time, etc., the game round for the first starting port Determined based on the predetermined parameters (jackpot type counter C2, variation type counter CS) obtained in .

For example, when the jackpot type of the first starting port game to be executed as the special bonus process is the 10R probability variable jackpot, the first starting port game to be executed as the special bonus process is being executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small winning, the fluctuation time of the game round for the second starting opening is determined based on the first high-probability low-frequency small winning fluctuation time table. decide. In addition, when the jackpot type of the first start-up game time executed as the special bonus process is the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the first start-up game time executed as the special bonus process is being executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small winning, the fluctuation time of the game round for the second starting opening is determined based on the second high-probability low-frequency small winning fluctuation time table. decide. Furthermore, when the jackpot type of the first start-up game run executed as the special bonus process is the 8R normal jackpot, the period during which the first start-up game run run as the special bonus process is executed. When the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the game round for the second starting port, the variation time of the game round for the second starting port is determined based on the third high-probability and low-frequency small winning variation time table. do.

When adopting such a configuration, the upper limit value of the number of execution times of the second start opening game round during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, depending on the type of the selected high-probability-low-frequency small winning fluctuation time table will be different. Therefore, in addition to the expectation that the special bonus process has started, it is possible to give the player an expectation about the method of setting the variation time of the game round for the second start opening during the special bonus process period. can.

B6-19. Variant 19:
In the above embodiment, at the start of the special bonus process, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off from ON, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. During the period from when the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF until the operation of the electric accessory 44a operates in the low-frequency support mode operation mode (hereinafter also referred to as the support mode transition period) Various modes can be adopted for the mode of operation of 44a. For example, in the case of the above-described embodiment, the electric accessory 44a executes the opening/closing operation three times in one electric role open winning in the high-frequency support mode. The number of opening/closing times of the electric accessory 44a for one electric role open winning is determined by the value of the second round counter area RC2 (see FIG. 115: electric role opening/closing process). That is, in the above-described embodiment, the value "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 when the electric worker opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode.

In the case of the processing mode of the electrical opening/closing process (FIG. 115) of the above-described embodiment, if the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF while the electric accessory 44a is being opened three times in the high-frequency support mode. In this case, for the remaining number of times of opening/closing, the opening/closing process is executed with the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low-frequency support mode is set. For example, when the electric role opening lottery is won during the high frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF at the time when the electric accessory 44a performs the opening and closing operation once, the remaining number of times of opening (hereinafter referred to as The opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for two times (also referred to as the remaining number of times of opening) is executed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a first operation mode. That is, when the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, if the remaining number of times of opening is not "0", the opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for the remaining number of times of opening is set to the low-frequency support mode for the opening time. It is executed in the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when it is done. In this case, at the same time or immediately after the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is suddenly changed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the sudden change in the action of the electric accessory 44a recognizes that the special bonus process has started and immediately starts hitting to the right.

However, it is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation of the electric accessory 44a is executed for the minute during the open time when the high-frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a second operation mode. By doing so, even if the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off from ON, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is not suddenly changed, and the player is informed that the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off from on. As a result, it is possible to delay the time until the player recognizes that the special bonus process has started. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the special bonus process is started until when the player starts hitting to the right. As a result, it is possible to suppress (reduce) the amount of benefits that the player can obtain through the special bonus process. Although the amount of benefits that the player can obtain by the special bonus process is reduced, even after the start of the special bonus process, the open/close process is executed during the opening time in the high-frequency support mode for the remaining number of times of the electric accessory 44a. Therefore, the player can obtain a privilege by entering the game ball into the first starting port 44.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the configuration of the above embodiment and the configuration shown in this modified example may be combined. That is, the electric accessory 44a may operate in the first operation mode or the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. For example, based on the jackpot type of the first starting game round corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You can decide whether to operate. More specifically, when the jackpot type of the game for the first starting port corresponding to the special bonus process is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, during the support mode transition period, the electric accessory 44a, Operate in the first operation mode, and when the jackpot type of the game for the first starting port corresponding to the special bonus process is the 8R normal jackpot, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may employ|adopt the structure of making it operate|move. Thus, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can obtain during the special bonus processing period.

In addition, as the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, in addition to the first operation mode and the second operation mode, a further different operation mode may be executed. Then, for example, based on the jackpot type of the first starting game round corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. Configurations that determine whether to operate or to operate in other operating modes may be employed. Thus, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can obtain during the special bonus processing period. Furthermore, the player who recognizes the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period can be made to make various guesses, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation.

C. Applies to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so as to reach a preset threshold value (10 points).

According to the feature A1, since the change control means is provided to change the predetermined amount so as to reach the preset threshold value in the game cycle, the player can control the change of the predetermined amount until the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value. can be brought to attention. Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The change control means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the

According to the feature A2, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the predetermined amount to reach the preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step by changing a predetermined amount and executing a specific process.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
A reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round. Amusement machine.

According to the feature A3, since the reset means for executing the reset process of returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the preset initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger, The player can be given a sense of anticipation such that a predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold. In addition, it is possible to make the player, who recognizes that the game round has started and the predetermined amount has started to change, be conscious of the time when the game round ends and pay attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A3,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case, (When the game round is a carry-over game round), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) changed in the game round is not returned to the initial value (carried over the accumulated points) when the game round ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A4, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value upon completion of the game cycle. To give a player a sense of expectation that a predetermined amount is maintained until the next game round without returning to an initial value at the end of the relevant game round, and that the predetermined amount may reach a threshold value in the next game round. can be done. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4,
The reset means is
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. A gaming machine comprising control means.

According to the feature A5, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made relevant over a plurality of game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5,
Reset processing execution suggesting means (stage a function to execute display control processing).

According to the feature A6, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. For the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as a result of the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value reaches the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to feature B1, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It can give the player a sense of anticipation that the amount may reach a threshold. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The reset means is
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Provide control means (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic B2, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. As such, it is possible to make the manner in which the predetermined amount changes relevant over multiple game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
When the predetermined game round in which the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is the third game round,
The specific process executing means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round executed after the third game round, the specific processing (button pressing effect) is executed in the third game round or the third game round is executed. Provided with specific processing execution control means for determining whether to execute in a game round executed after the game round (effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B3, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, the specific process is executed in the third game round or after the third game round. Since it is determined whether or not to be executed in the game round to be executed, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the specific process is executed, the player can make various guesses about the special information corresponding to the third game round and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed after the third game round. can let For example, even if a specific process is not executed in a game round, there is a possibility that a specific process will not be executed in the next game round because the specific process will be executed in the next game round. It is possible to make the player guess and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to feature B4, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature B5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature B5, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
A gaming machine comprising: predetermined amount display means (function for executing point accumulation processing/function for displaying an image of a pearl on a stage) that displays corresponding to the predetermined amount (accumulated points).

According to feature B6, since the predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount is provided, the player can always be made aware of the predetermined amount and can be made to pay attention to the game.

[Feature B7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6,
A reset processing execution suggesting means for suggesting, in a predetermined game round, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to an initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round. (Effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the characteristic B7, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. For the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as a result of the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value reaches the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
with
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button depression effect), the predetermined amount is changed to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine comprising change control means.

According to feature C1, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The changing means includes change amount determining means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round based on special information corresponding to a second game round executed after the first game round. Provided (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. The variable predetermined amount can be made relevant over multiple game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The changing means includes change timing determining means for determining the timing for changing the predetermined amount in a game round based on special information corresponding to the game round (effect information setting processing and effect setting in the first embodiment). process)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature C3, the timing for changing the predetermined amount in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round. The predetermined amount can be varied with timing adapted to the various factors to be determined.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
A reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends,
The reset means is
means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round. Provided (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C4, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process when the first game round ends. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made relevant over a plurality of game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
a reset means for executing a reset process for returning the predetermined amount changed in a game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round;
The reset means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the game round, means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the game round as a trigger (effect information setting process in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C5, based on the special information corresponding to the game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the game round as a trigger. Considering various factors determined by other special information, it is possible to determine whether or not to restore the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to the characteristic C6, since a specific effect is executed as a specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature C7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) as a result of the change by the changing means;
When the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, time suggesting means (point filling time control) for executing a time suggesting process (timer effect) that suggests the time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the specific processing is executed because the time suggesting means is provided for executing the time suggesting processing that suggests the time until the specific processing is executed. During the period from the suggestion of the time until the execution of the specific process, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation for the specific process that will be executed after the implied time elapses. can. In addition, since the time suggesting means suggests that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
When the game round in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the first game round,
The time suggesting means (function for executing control processing during point filling)
In the first case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is started in the first game round,
In the second case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is not started in the first game round, and in the second game round which is the game round executed after the first game round A gaming machine comprising means for starting execution of the time suggesting process.

According to the feature D2, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value in the first game round, the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round and executed after the first game round. Since there is a case where it is executed in a second game round which is a game round in which the A player can be given the pleasure of guessing when a particular action will be performed.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D2,
The first case is a case where the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button pressing effect) in the first game cycle,
In the second case, the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button depression effect) in a game cycle executed after the first game cycle.

According to feature D3, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round, the player is instructed to It is possible to make the player aware that a specific process will be executed, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the first game round. Further, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggesting process is not started in the first game round, the player is instructed to play a game after the first game round. It is possible to make the player recognize that a specific process will be executed in the game round, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the subsequent game round.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
When the game round in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the third game round,
The specific process executing means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, the specific process is executed in the third game round or executed after the third game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute the specific process in a game turn.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to give a relationship over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the time suggesting process that suggests the time until the execution of a specific process is executed, it is possible for the player to guess which game round he or she can expect, thereby providing new game characteristics. can be created.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to the characteristic D5, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature D6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature D6, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a first process executing means for executing a first process (waiting effect) when a specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated in the first embodiment);
a second process executing means for executing a second process (timer effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated);
with
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round,
The first processing execution means is
When the second process executing means executes the second process (timer effect) in the second game round executed after the first game round, the first game round is executed in the first game round. Execute the process (waiting effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second process executing means executes the second process (timer effect) in the first game cycle, the first process (waiting effect) is not executed. .

According to the feature E1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the second process is executed in the second game round, after the specific condition is satisfied A period of time occurs before the second process is performed. In such a case, since the first process executing means executes the first process in the first game cycle, even during the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the second process is executed, , the player can be made aware that the second process will be executed later, and the expectation for the second process can be maintained.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the first game round, the second game round is executed in the first game round. Processing (timer effect) is executed,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the second game round, the second game round is executed in the second game round. A game machine characterized by executing processing (timer effect).

According to the feature E2, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, the player recognizes in which game round the second process is executed, thereby executing the specific process. Since it is possible to guess the game turn to be executed, the player can be made to concentrate on the timing of execution of the second process, and the player who recognizes the execution of the second process can expect it. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E2,
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button pressing effect) in the first game round or the above-mentioned A game machine comprising specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific process (button depression effect).

According to feature E3, specific processing is executed in the first game round or executed in the second game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, it is possible to give a relationship over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, it is possible for the player who recognizes the execution of the second process to guess the timing at which the specific process will be executed, and based on the estimated timing at which the specific process will be executed, the special information for each game round can be made. satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the player can guess whether or not the special information in each game round satisfies a predetermined condition by various factors, and the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3,
The second process (timer effect) is performed until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated). A gaming machine characterized by a process suggesting time.

According to the feature E4, during the period from when the execution of the second process indicates the time until the specific process is executed until the specific process is executed, the execution is performed after the suggested time elapses. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the particular process to be performed. In addition, since it is suggested that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine, wherein the first process (waiting effect) is a process suggesting execution of the second process (timer effect).

According to feature E5, the first process is a process that suggests that the second process is to be executed. It is possible to give a feeling of anticipation about the execution of processing.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
When the first process (predetermined effect in modification 1 of the first embodiment) is executed in the game round, after the first process in the game round is executed, the predetermined amount is There are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed,
When the second process (the specific effect in the modification 1 of the first embodiment) is executed in the game round, after the second process in the game round is executed, the predetermined amount is A gaming machine characterized by constant change.

According to the feature F1, when the second process is executed in the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the execution of the processing of (1) and to draw attention to the game. Further, when the second process is executed, it is possible to impart an uplifting feeling to the player who desires a change of a predetermined amount, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) is provided,
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button pressing effect), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 A game machine characterized by comprising a change control means for changing so as to reach a point).

According to feature F2, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount is always changed in the game round, so that the player who recognizes that the second process has been executed is instructed to perform the specific process. A sense of anticipation about execution can be imparted.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F2,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game round) is more likely than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button pressing effect) is executed.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing a specific process. Therefore, the second process, the change in the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process can give the player a sense of anticipation step by step.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to feature F3,
The first process is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect in modification 1 of the first embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein the second process is a preset specific effect (a specific effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment).

According to the feature F4, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed in the game round. Then, when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to impart a great sense of anticipation and excitement to the player.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F4,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature F5, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
Predetermined processing executing means (function for executing point giving effect) for executing predetermined processing (point giving in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The predetermined process execution means is
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, there are cases where the predetermined process is executed and cases where the predetermined process is not executed in the game round executed after the game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined processing is always executed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to the feature G1, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game round executed after the game round. , it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the mode in the game round and to make the player pay attention to the game in the game round. Further, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is executed in the game round executed after the game round for the player who desired the execution of the predetermined process. It is possible to provide a sense of anticipation and an uplifting feeling about this, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The predetermined process execution means is
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means (the function of executing the point giving effect in Modification 2 of the first embodiment) is
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, there are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed in the game round executed after the game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount is always changed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to the feature G2, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, in the game round executed after the game round, the predetermined amount always changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the mode of the game round, and to make them pay attention to the game in the game round. Further, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount will change in the game round executed after the game round for the player who desired the change of the predetermined amount. A sense of anticipation can be imparted, and a sense of exhilaration can be imparted, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to feature G2,
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
The first mode of the game cycle is a mode in which the reset means resets the predetermined amount to an initial value upon completion of the game cycle,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode of the game cycle is a mode in which the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value when the game cycle ends.

According to feature G3, if the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round executed after the game round. , a player who desires a change in a predetermined amount can be given a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value when the game round ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the player who desired to change the predetermined amount will receive the predetermined amount in the game round executed after the game round. It is possible to provide a sense of anticipation about the change in the amount, and to provide a sense of elation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) is provided,
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, change control means for changing the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G4, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round executed after the game round. , the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount has not returned to the initial value can be given a sense of expectation for execution of a specific process.

[Feature G5]
The gaming machine according to feature G4,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game round) is more likely than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button pressing effect) is executed.

According to feature G5, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing a specific process. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the reset process, the change of the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step.

[Feature G6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5,
Reset processing execution suggesting means (stage a function to execute display control processing).

According to the feature G6, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. According to the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round after the predetermined game round for the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round. It is possible to impart a sense of expectation such that the amount will not return to the initial value and a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that the predetermined amount that has not returned to the initial value will reach the threshold value in the game rounds after the predetermined game round.

[Feature G7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G4 to G6,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature G7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a predetermined process executing means for executing a predetermined process in the game round;
Predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (point giving effect) prior to the predetermined process executing means executing the predetermined process;
with
The predetermined process execution means is
A non-execution means for executing a non-execution process (a point giving effect in which the given point is 0) in which the predetermined process is not executed even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H1, the predetermined process execution means includes a non-execution means for executing a non-execution process that does not execute the predetermined process even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. It is possible to make the player who recognizes that the non-execution process is not executed. In addition, when the non-execution process is not executed, the player can be given an uplifting feeling, and when the non-execution process is executed, the player is discouraged. That is, depending on whether or not the non-execution process is executed, the expectation of the player can be given an intonation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The predetermined process execution means is
As the predetermined process, changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The non-executing means is
A no-change means for executing a no-change process (a point giving effect in which the given point is 0) that does not change the predetermined amount even though the predetermined effect executing means has executed the predetermined effect. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H2, even though the predetermined effect executing means has executed the predetermined effect, the no-change means for executing the non-change processing that does not change the predetermined amount, so that the execution of the predetermined effect can be detected. The recognized player can be made to expect that the non-change process will not be executed. Also, if the no-change process is not executed, the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and if the no-change process is executed, the player is discouraged. In other words, depending on whether or not the non-change process is executed, the expectation of the player can be given an intonation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
A reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends,
An upper limit is provided to the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change processing (point giving effect in which the given points are 0) during a period from the start of the game cycle until the resetting means executes the reset processing. (Modification 3 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H3, the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change process during the period from the start of the game cycle until the reset means executes the reset process is limited. A player who recognizes that the number of times of execution has reached the upper limit can be given a strong sense of expectation for execution of a predetermined effect. This is because when the number of executions of the non-change processing reaches the upper limit, the predetermined amount is always changed when the predetermined effect is executed after that. Therefore, even when the no-change process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit. That is, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the no-change process is not executed, the predetermined amount changes, so that the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and the no-change process is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in both cases in which no-change processing is executed and in which no-change processing is executed.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature H3,
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process;
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
change control means for changing the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means when the specific process execution means executes the specific process; A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H4, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Since the change control means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation each time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Also, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of expectation step by step through a predetermined effect, presence or absence of non-change processing, the number of executions of non-change processing, a predetermined amount of change, and execution of specific processing. can.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round , the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the relevant game round but is maintained until the next game round, and the player can expect that the predetermined amount will reach the threshold value in the next game round. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first specific process executing means for executing a first specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means; ,
a second specific process executing means for executing a second specific process (non-filling effect in modification 4 of the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold;
with
When the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the amount of change (accumulated points) from the initial value of the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed is The special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies the predetermined condition more when the second amount of change is greater than the first amount of change than when the amount of change is the first amount of change. Amusement machines characterized by high expectations.

According to feature I1, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the predetermined amount The larger the amount of change from the initial value of , the higher the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. That is, when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, and when the amount of change from the initial value of the predetermined amount is relatively large, the second specific process is performed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the process of is executed.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
In the first specific process (button depression effect), the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized in that the probability of execution is higher in case.

According to feature I2, it is possible to give the player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed a strong sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game cycle will satisfy a predetermined condition. can. Also, since the first specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The content of the second specific process (unfilled effect) differs depending on the predetermined amount (accumulated points) before the second specific process is executed (the Modification 4)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I3, the content of the processing differs depending on the predetermined amount before the execution of the second specific processing. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the content and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
A third specific process executing means for executing a third specific process (unfilled development effect in Modification 4 of the first embodiment) after the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed. ,
In the game round, the case where the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed is more likely than the case where the first specific process (button pressing effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a high degree of expectation that the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature I4, the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition more when the third specific process is executed than when the first specific process is executed. Expectations are high. Therefore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the player is notified that , a strong expectation that the third specific process will be executed. Furthermore, when the third specific process is executed, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the first specific process is executed. A stronger sense of expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the third specific process has been executed. In summary, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the first specific process is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation, and when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. Even if the second specific process is executed, the player is expected to perform the second specific process, and when the second specific process is executed, the third specific process is executed. It is possible to impart a strong sense of expectation to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
game round display means for displaying a game round display that is a display showing one game round being held or being executed;
display mode changing means for executing a display mode changing process for changing the display mode of the game cycle display being displayed (a function of executing processing for changing the display mode of the game cycle display in the fifth modification of the first embodiment); ,
Predetermined process executing means (function for executing point giving effect) for executing a predetermined process (giving points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
with
A gaming machine, wherein a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the predetermined process executing means executes the predetermined process have a temporal correlation.

According to the feature J1, the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the predetermined process are executed with the timing correlated, thereby synergistically increasing the expectation of the player. can.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The predetermined process execution means is
provided with changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in game rounds (modification 5 in the first embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

According to the feature J2, the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the change in the predetermined amount are executed with the timing correlated, thereby synergistically increasing the expectation of the player. can.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
The changing means is
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined amount is changed within a predetermined time after the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process.

According to the feature J3, the player, who recognizes that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed and has an increased sense of anticipation, is further made to recognize that a predetermined amount has changed within a predetermined period of time. It is possible to impart a stronger sense of expectation and excitement.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
A gaming machine, wherein the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount are the same.

According to the characteristic J4, by making the player simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the change of the predetermined amount, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
The game machine, wherein the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

According to the feature J5, the player, who recognizes that the predetermined amount has changed and has an increased sense of anticipation, is further made to recognize that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed within a predetermined period of time. It is possible to impart a stronger sense of expectation and excitement.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5,
The display mode of the game cycle display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means have a correlation (Modification 5 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature J6, the display mode of the game cycle display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means are correlated with each other. If the display mode of the game cycle display after the change is in line with the player's expectations, and if the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is large, to the player, A stronger sense of expectation and superiority can be imparted.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J6,
The display mode changing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies the predetermined condition, the display mode of the game cycle display is changed to the second display mode rather than changing the display mode of the game cycle display to the first display mode. The probability of changing the display mode is high,
The amount of change of the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means when the display mode changing means changes the game round display to the first display mode is defined as a first change amount,
When the change amount of the predetermined amount that the change means changes when the display mode change means changes the game cycle display to the second display mode is the second change amount,
The average value of the second amount of change is larger than the average value of the first amount of change (Modification 5 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature J7, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the probability of changing the display mode of the game round display to the second display mode is high, and further, the display mode changing means changes the game round display to the second display mode. When the display mode is changed to the first display mode, the amount of change in the predetermined amount is often larger than when the display mode is changed to the first display mode. By executing the change of and the timing with correlation, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Change mode information display means for displaying change mode information that is information on the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (in the 13th modification of the first embodiment, an image of a pearl on the stage St indicating accumulation points is displayed); function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, since the change mode information display means for displaying the change mode information, which is information regarding the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, the player can see how the predetermined amount has changed. It is possible to easily comprehend, prompt the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The changing means comprises means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means is
Means for displaying the change state information in a manner in which the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the change means at each of the timings can be identified (on the stage St indicating accumulated points in Modification Example 13 of the first embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of displaying an image of a pearl of the same name.

According to the feature K2, since the change mode information is displayed in a manner in which the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means at each timing can be identified, the player who recognizes the change mode information can, for example, , prompting the user to find regularity in the amount of change of a predetermined amount that has changed at each timing so far, or urging the user to guess the amount of change of the predetermined amount at the next and subsequent timings. It is possible to provide the player with a new enjoyment based on the change mode information.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The changing means is
Means for determining the mode of change of the predetermined amount based on the special information corresponding to the game round (function for determining the point award scenario based on the production scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature K3, since the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, the change mode information, which is information on the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, is recognized. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the special information corresponding to the game round.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
Based on the special information corresponding to the game round, an effect determination means for determining the effect to be executed in the game round,
The changing means is
means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount (a point-giving scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment) based on the determined production (production scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment); A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K4, the effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, and the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the determined effect. A player who recognizes the change mode information, which is information about the change mode of a predetermined amount, is made to make various guesses about the content of the performance to be executed later in the game cycle, and gives a sense of expectation based on the change mode information. can be granted.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first effect executing means for executing a first effect (a point giving suggesting effect in Modification 14 of the first embodiment) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
After the first effect is executed, the execution of the second effect (point giving execution effect in the modification 14 of the first embodiment), which is the effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed. means and
with
The second production execution means is
In the first case, the second effect is executed once after the first effect is executed once, and in the second case, after the first effect is executed once. , means for executing the second effect N (integer of N≧2) times.

According to feature L1, since the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for the player who recognizes the first effect. It can give you a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. Therefore, when the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, the player receives a predetermined amount of N times after the first effect is executed once. You can recognize that you have changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player who has recognized the first effect a feeling of anticipation as to how many times the predetermined amount will change after that. When the second performance is executed N times after the first performance is executed once, the execution of the first performance is recognized, and then the second performance is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be imparted to the player who has guessed that the game will be played.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The changing means includes change amount information acquisition means for acquiring change amount information that is information corresponding to the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed,
The second production execution means is
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by a change amount corresponding to the change amount information is executed once. death,
In the second case, the amount of change corresponding to the amount of change information is divided into N pieces, and after the first effect is executed once, the amount of change divided into the N pieces is one each. (modification 14 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature L2, in both the first case and the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the change amount information corresponding to the first effect to be executed. Even in the case of executing it twice, the process up to the process of acquiring the change amount information is the same as in the first case, and the process can be simplified. In addition, the change amount information can be set without distinguishing between the case where the information is used in the first case and the case where the information is used in the second case, and the setting of the change amount information can be simplified. can.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The changing means acquires second effect change amount information that is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change indicating that the second effect is to be changed for one time. with
The second production execution means is
In the first case, one piece of the second effect change amount information is acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, a change corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information Execute once the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount for the amount is changed,
In the second case, N pieces of the second effect change amount information are acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information are The second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the corresponding amount of change is executed N times corresponding to the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information (first embodiment). Modification 14)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature L3, in the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the second effect change amount information of the number corresponding to the number of times of the second effect to be executed. It is not necessary to divide the change amount corresponding to the usage change amount information into N parts according to the number of times of the second effect to be executed, and the process can be simplified.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. ), characterized in that it comprises a means for changing so as to reach

According to the feature L4, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player each time the amount is changed. That is, every time the second effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation. Therefore, by changing a predetermined amount (execution of the second effect) and executing specific processing, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first effect executing means for executing a first effect (first effect in modification 10 of the first embodiment) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
Execution of a second effect for executing a second effect (a second effect in the tenth modification of the first embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed after the first effect is executed. means and
with
The first production execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in a second game round which is a game round executed after the first game round,
means for starting, in the first game round, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
means for starting, in the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature M1, since the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for the player who recognizes the first effect. It can give you a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. In addition, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round may be started in the first game round or may be executed in the second game round. . In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game round, the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game round and in the game rounds executed after the predetermined game round. The player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed can be made to guess which case it is, and a sense of anticipation can be imparted.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The first production execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game round,
means for notifying, in the first game round, the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means in the second game round;
means for notifying, in the second game round, the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means in the second game round;
(Modification 10 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature M2, when the predetermined amount is changed in the second game round, the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game round is notified in the first game round, and the second There is a case where the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed in the game round is reported in the second game round. In other words, in a predetermined game round, when a predetermined amount of change is notified, in the predetermined game round, when the predetermined amount corresponding to the notified amount of change changes, In the game round executed after the game round, the predetermined amount corresponding to the notified amount of change may change, and for the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount of change has been notified, A sense of expectation can be imparted by allowing the user to speculate as to which of these cases is the case.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to the feature M3, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It can give the player a sense of anticipation that the amount may reach a threshold. Therefore, according to the feature M1, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined amount may change in the predetermined game round, or may change in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. Further, when the predetermined amount changes due to the characteristic M3, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value upon completion of the game cycle. A sense of expectation can be given to the player.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The effect execution means comprises change effect execution means for executing a change effect (point giving effect) that is a effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes when the change means changes the predetermined amount,
The change effect execution means performs the change effect (the point giving effect in the eleventh modification of the first embodiment) based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining

According to the feature N1, since the change performance execution means determines the mode of the change performance based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the predetermined amount, the game is executed with respect to the mode of the change performance to be executed. can draw people's attention. In addition, it is possible to give the player who recognizes that the change effect has been executed a sense of expectation for the game round in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The production executing means is
A game round effect determining means for determining a game round effect (a effect scenario in Modification 11 of the first embodiment), which is an effect to be executed in the game round, based on the special information corresponding to the game round,
The change effect execution means changes the mode of the change effect (the point giving effect in the eleventh modification of the first embodiment) based on the content of the game round effect (the effect scenario in the eleventh modification of the first embodiment). A game machine characterized by comprising means for determining.

According to the feature N2, the changing effect executing means determines the mode of the changing effect based on the contents of the game round effect, so that the player who recognizes that the changing effect has been executed is notified of the changing effect. Based on the mode, it is possible to make the player guess about the contents of the game round presentation to be executed thereafter, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
The change effect execution means is
When the game round effect includes a specific effect and the changing means changes the predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, the predetermined amount is changed. (Modification 11 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature N3, when the game round effect includes a specific effect and the change means changes a predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, , since a change effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed is executed in a specific mode, the relationship between the mode of each change effect to be executed and the content of the game cycle effect to be executed after that is given to the player. Each time a change performance is executed, the content of the game round performance to be executed thereafter is made to be guessed. Further, based on the content of the game round effect that has been inferred, it is possible to impart a sense of expectation for the special information corresponding to the game round.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
a predetermined amount display means for displaying a predetermined amount;
a calculation suggestion effect execution means for executing a calculation suggestion effect that is a mode effect suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be subjected to a calculation process;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation suggestion effect executing means,
As the one-time operation suggesting effect, a mode suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be added or a mode suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied. from any one of the modes to indicate that the displayed predetermined amount is subjected to addition processing or that the displayed predetermined amount is subjected to multiplication processing Equipped with an arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means for executing an arithmetic processing mode change effect that is an effect of changing to one of the suggested modes to the other mode (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature O1, by changing the aspect of the calculation suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the calculation method executed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, and to add unexpectedness. . In addition, since the new predetermined amount after the execution of the calculation processing may differ greatly depending on the calculation method executed for the predetermined amount, by changing the aspect of the calculation suggestion effect, the player can In addition to imparting a sense of urgency to the game, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectation.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
The aspect that suggests that addition processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is an addition symbol indication aspect that is an aspect of displaying an arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition,
The mode of indicating that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied is a multiplication symbol display mode, which is a mode of displaying an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication,
The arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means is
As the arithmetic processing mode change effect, either the displayed arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition or the arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is rotated to display an arithmetic symbol indicating addition. Equipped with means for executing an effect to change the display to the other of a certain "+" or an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication (Modification 15 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature O2, by executing a process of rotating symbols of almost the same line drawing such as "+" and "x", the meaning can be greatly changed. In addition to imparting a great sense of urgency to the game, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectation.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 and feature O2,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
with
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. ), characterized in that it comprises a means for changing so as to reach

According to the characteristic O3, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player each time the amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of urgency with respect to the change in the mode of the computational suggestion performance, and to greatly inflate the player's sense of expectation for the game when the mode of the computational suggestion performance is changed. can be given.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
multiplication mode effect execution means for executing a multiplication mode effect, which is a mode effect suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied, prior to the change of the predetermined amount;
(Modification 15 in the first embodiment),
The predetermined amount display means is
means for displaying a multiplication result amount, which is an amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature P1, since the multiplication mode performance executing means for executing the multiplication mode performance is provided, the player who recognizes the execution of the multiplication mode performance is given an expectation for the value to be multiplied by the predetermined amount. It is possible to draw attention to the multiplication mode effect.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
The multiplication mode effect execution means is
Means for controlling the aspect of the multiplication aspect effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount (Modification 15 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature P2, the multiplication mode effect executing means controls the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount, so pay attention to the mode of the multiplication mode effect. can be made

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The predetermined amount display means is
Means for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, an amount larger than a multiplication result amount, which is an amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect. (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P3, when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect, an amount larger than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to impart surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes a new predetermined amount greater than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, suggesting that addition processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount prior to changing the predetermined amount. An addition mode effect executing means for executing an addition mode effect that is a mode effect,
The predetermined amount display means is
means for displaying, when the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an addition result amount, which is an amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount ( 1st embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P4, since the addition mode effect executing means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and tension as to whether the addition mode effect is executed or the multiplication mode effect is executed.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4,
An addition mode effect executing means for executing an addition mode effect, which is a mode effect suggesting that addition processing is performed to the displayed predetermined amount, prior to the change of the predetermined amount. ,
The predetermined amount display means is
When the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Provided with means (modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P5, when the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to impart surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes a new predetermined amount that is greater than the addition result amount.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a first changing means for changing the first amount in the game round (a function of giving points in the modification 22 of the first embodiment);
a second changing means for changing the second amount in the game round (the function of giving points in the modification 22 of the first embodiment);
a first specific process executing means for executing a first specific process;
a second specific process executing means for executing a second specific process;
with
The first changing means is
When the first specific process executing means executes the first specific process, the first amount is reduced to a preset first threshold value ( 10 points),
The second changing means is
When the second specific process executing means executes the second specific process, the second amount is reduced to a preset second threshold value ( 10 points).

According to the feature Q1, when the first specific process executing means executes the first specific process, the first changing means preliminarily changes the first amount by the time the first specific process is executed. change so as to reach the set first threshold, and the second changing means, when the second specific process executing means executes the second specific process, until the second specific process is executed In addition, since the second amount is changed to reach the preset second threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the first amount changes, and furthermore, the second amount changes, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to changes in at least two amounts in the game round, and to give the player a sense of anticipation.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round in which the first specific process is performed satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than the game round in which the first specific process is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by a high

According to the feature Q2, the player who recognizes that the first specific process is executed in the game round is given a sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition. be able to.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
Reset processing for returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount, which have changed in a game round, to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round (point reset processing in the first embodiment) A game machine characterized by comprising a reset means for executing

According to the characteristic Q3, since the resetting means is provided, at least one of the first amount and the second amount is set to the threshold value (first threshold value, second threshold value) corresponding to each amount by the time the game round ends. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player so that the Further, the player who recognizes that the game round has started and at least one of the first amount and the second amount has started to change is made aware of the time when the game round ends, and the first amount and the second amount are changed. Attention can be drawn to the changing manner of the second quantity.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q3,
The reset means is
In the first case, at least one of the first amount and the second amount that changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is carried over means for not returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round to the initial value (carrying over accumulated points) upon completion of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Q4, at least one of the first amount and the second amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game cycle. Even if at least one of the second amounts does not reach the threshold value corresponding to each amount, the amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and is maintained until the next game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that there is a possibility that the number of rounds will reach the threshold. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon completion of the game round,
The reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger. The degree of expectation is high that the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed later satisfies the predetermined condition (Modification 25 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature R1, the reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value when the game round ends, the greater the number of triggers for the end of the game round, the more the predetermined value. Since there is a high expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round executed after the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game round ends. continues, the greater expectation can be imparted to the player.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
When the special information in the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means is
means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game round to the initial value until the second game round;
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for limiting the amount of change in the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value from the first game round to the second game round.

According to the feature R2, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, and the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value continues after the game round ends. , can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing when the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold value.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point-giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) from a preset initial value in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
threshold changing means for executing a threshold changing process for changing the threshold value (modification 26 of the first embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S1, a predetermined amount is changed in a game cycle, and a specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value. can be made Further, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and a specific process is executed, the player can be given a feeling of superiority or expectation. Furthermore, since the threshold may be changed, it is difficult for the player to guess the timing at which the specific process will be executed, and the specific process can be executed at a timing unexpected by the player. As a result, it is possible to impart surprise to the player.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The threshold changing means is
A gaming machine comprising threshold change processing determination means for determining whether or not to execute the threshold change processing in a game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round.

According to the feature S2, it is determined whether or not to execute the threshold changing process in the game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round, so the player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed, or To give a player, who recognizes that a threshold has been changed when a specific process is executed, a sense of expectation as to whether or not special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. can be done.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of execution.

According to the characteristic S3, when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the specific process is executed in the game round. Since there is a high probability that a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, since a specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the predetermined amount changes.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Before the predetermined amount is changed, a change amount display (an imparted point suggestive display in Modification 27 of the first embodiment) showing information regarding the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means is displayed. change amount display means;
A game machine with

According to the characteristic T1, before the predetermined amount is changed, the amount of change display showing information about the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means is displayed, so that the player who recognizes the display of the amount of change is notified of the amount of change. Therefore, it is possible to provide various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the change amount display.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
game round display means for displaying a game round display that is a display showing one game round being held or being executed;
The change amount display means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round.

According to the feature T2, the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round display. The recognized player can be given various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the displayed variation display. For example, when the change amount display is displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the pending game round, various speculations and expectations regarding the pending game round are given to the player who recognizes the change amount display. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T2,
The change amount display means is
After displaying the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for displaying in association with.

According to the feature T3, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. Since it is displayed in association with the display, it is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the change amount display displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round. can add surprise.
[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to feature T2 or feature T3,
The change amount display means is
After displaying a change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round, a change corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round A gaming machine characterized by displaying a quantity display.

According to the characteristic T4, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round, the change corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round is displayed. Since the amount display is displayed, the guess of the player based on the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round can be overturned, and the player can be given an unexpected result. It is possible to impart a sense of anticipation to the player, as well as impart an intonation.

[Feature T5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment),
The changing means is
A change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) to reach a preset threshold value (10 points),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The change control means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the

According to the characteristic T5, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the predetermined amount to reach the preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step by changing a predetermined amount and executing a specific process.

The inventions of the above feature group A to feature group T solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature U1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (low-frequency support mode); and
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, at the start of the game cycle informing the result of the determination, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low A game machine characterized by comprising means for switching to a frequency support mode).

According to the feature U1, at the start of the game cycle for informing the result of determination based on the result of determination by the determination means, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode. The process executed after the start of the turn and the control mode of the state transition means can prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous. For example, when the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode that is advantageous to the player, if the state becomes advantageous to the player due to the processing executed after the start of the game round, the state is excessively advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that it will become. However, since the game machine according to this feature is provided with means for switching the control mode based on the result of determination by the determination means at the start of a game round, for example, the processing executed after the start of a game round can change a state advantageous to the player. In such a case, by switching the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous. .

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at a predetermined shooting intensity by the shooting means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high-frequency support mode), the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low-frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry portion than in the case where the is controlled.

According to the feature U2, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry portion than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this characteristic, when the processing executed after the start of a game round brings about a state advantageous to the player, the control mode is accordingly changed from the control mode advantageous to the player to the control mode advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to switch to a control mode that does not become excessive, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, post-game bonus awarding means (a function of executing a round game) for awarding a bonus after the game round for informing the result of the determination is completed. )When,
If the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, the game round in-execution privilege granting means for imparting a privilege during the execution of the game round (function for executing special bonus processing) and
The control means is
When the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific processing flag is ON), the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round. A gaming machine comprising switching means (function for turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

According to the feature U3, when a game cycle to be executed satisfies a specific condition, a privilege is given by the game cycle-executing privilege imparting means during the execution of the game cycle, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round when the game round satisfies a specific condition. It is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state even during the period in which the privilege is being given by the privilege giving means during execution.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
with
The auxiliary means is
arranged in either the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion;
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a second special information game round, which is a game round, in parallel.

According to feature U4, means for executing the first special information game round and the second special information game round in parallel is provided. It becomes possible to perform a process of giving a privilege for the determination result. In such a case, the processing executed after the start of the first special information game round brings the player into an advantageous state. Since means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during execution of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature V1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a round game) that grants a privilege after the game cycle for informing the result of the determination is completed;
The game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (the game round in which the jackpot is won) is defined as the condition-fulfilling game round, and the condition-fulfilling game round that is executed first among the two condition-fulfilling game times. is a precondition satisfied game round, and the condition satisfied game round to be executed after the precondition satisfied game round is a postcondition satisfied game round, the processing at the start of the postcondition satisfied game round is the above Processing determination means for determining based on the special information corresponding to the previous condition fulfillment game round (based on the jackpot type of the previous game round in which the jackpot was won, special bonus processing at the start of the game round after winning the jackpot) A function that determines whether to execute related processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature V1, since the process determining means for determining the process at the start of the post-condition satisfied game round based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition satisfied game round is provided, the post-condition satisfied game round is executed. In advance, it is possible to execute a corresponding process for the process to be executed at the start of the post-condition fulfillment game cycle. For example, in a game round where a precondition is established, an effect that suggests processing to be executed at the start of a game round where a postcondition is established is executed, or in a game round which is executed between a game round where a precondition is established and a game round where a postcondition is established. It is possible to execute various corresponding processes for the processing to be executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game round, such as execution of an effect suggesting the processing to be executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game round, to improve the interest of the game. be able to.
In addition, since the process at the start of the post-condition-fulfilled game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition-fulfilled game round, for example, the process determined as the process at the start of the post-condition-fulfilled game round If the processing is advantageous to the player, as a corresponding processing for the processing, a processing that does not become excessively advantageous to the player by the processing is performed based on the special information corresponding to the condition satisfaction game round. Can be run at startup.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (low-frequency support mode); and
with
The processing determination means is
Determining whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode (determining whether or not to turn off a high-frequency support mode flag) at the start of the post-condition satisfied game round , means for executing based on the special information corresponding to the precondition fulfillment game round.

According to feature V2, the process determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-condition-fulfilled game round, corresponding to the pre-condition-fulfilled game round. Since the execution is based on the special information, for example, when a process advantageous to the player is executed at the start of the post-condition-fulfilled game round based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition-fulfilled game round, the corresponding process is performed. As processing, it is determined whether or not the control mode is switched from a control mode advantageous to the player to a control mode not excessively advantageous to the player at the start of the post-condition satisfied game round based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition satisfied game round. It is possible to execute the determination, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to feature V2,
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
with
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The game machine further comprises
game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time,
The game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as the first condition established game round, and the first condition established game round that is executed first among the two first condition established game rounds is defined as the first condition established game round. When the first condition fulfillment game round is set as the first condition fulfillment game round and the first condition fulfillment game round to be executed after the first condition fulfillment game round is the first post condition fulfillment game round,
The playing time determination means is
A method of setting the game time of the second special information game cycle executed during the period in which the first post-condition-fulfilled game cycle is executed, based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition-fulfilled game cycle. means for determining by (processing for setting the fluctuation time for the second start port in the second embodiment/the first start that won the jackpot later based on the jackpot type of the game for the first start port that won the jackpot earlier ON/OFF of a high-frequency support mode flag is determined at the start of the opening game round, and a period during which the first start-up opening game round in which a jackpot is won later is executed based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of determining a method of setting the variation time of the game round for the second starting port executed at the beginning.

According to the feature V3, the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game cycle to be executed during the period in which the first post-condition fulfillment game cycle is executed is set to the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition fulfillment game cycle. Therefore, for example, based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition fulfillment game, the game time of the second special information game to be executed during the period in which the first post-condition fulfillment game is executed. A setting method that is advantageous to the player can be determined. More specifically, as the setting method of the game time of the second special information game round, it is possible to determine a setting method in which the average value of the game time is relatively short. In this case, there is a risk that the period during which the first post-condition-fulfilling game round is being executed becomes excessively advantageous to the player. Since the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition fulfillment game round based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition fulfillment game round, for example, the control mode advantageous to the player can be changed to be advantageous to the player. By switching to the control mode that is not excessive, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the period in which the first post-condition fulfillment game round is being executed.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature W1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (low-frequency support mode); and
A gaming machine comprising
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at a predetermined firing intensity by the shooting means, the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high-frequency support mode). However, it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry section than when the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode),
The game time setting means is
At least a first setting method and a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than the first setting method can be executed as the game time setting method,
The control means is
The game time setting means switches the method of setting the game time from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific trigger (at the start of the specific bonus process, the game time for the second start opening is switched). Switching the variable time setting method/switching from high-probability high-frequency variable time information acquisition processing to high-probability low-frequency variable time information acquisition processing), the control mode is changed based on the specific trigger. A game machine comprising means for switching from a first control mode to the second control mode (a function for turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

In a general game machine, when the game time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than that in the first setting method, the state The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering portion more easily than in the second control mode. However, in this case, the player may be in an excessively advantageous situation.
According to the gaming machine having the characteristic W1, the control mode is switched to the second setting method based on the specific trigger, although the game time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on the specific trigger. Since the first control mode is switched to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
with
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The specific trigger is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition,
The control means is
Said game time setting means sets said game time of said second special information game time to be executed during a period in which said first special information game time corresponding to said first special information satisfying said predetermined condition is being executed. Despite switching the setting method of from the first setting method to the second setting method,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is switched from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency support mode) based on the specific trigger.

According to feature W2, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition is being executed is Even when a state becomes advantageous to a player by switching from a setting method of 1 to a setting method of 2, a first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition is started. Since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode with this as a trigger, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.
Furthermore, since the trigger for switching the control mode is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege is given after the first special information game round is finished. It is also possible to execute a process such as that described above, and it is possible to provide the player with various changes in the state of the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature X1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The production executing means is
The effect executed in the second special information game round executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round corresponds to the first special information game round. means for determining based on the first special information (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a process of setting a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus).

According to the feature X1, the effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round is Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game round, the player can indirectly guess the first special information game round through the effect executed in the second special information game round. A sense of expectation for the first special information game round can be imparted by utilizing the effect executed in the second special information game round.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege after a game cycle for informing the result of the determination is finished;
privilege type determination means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means from among a plurality of types of the privilege;
with
The production executing means is
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, based on the type of the privilege given after the first special information game round is completed, the first special information game round is determined. Means for determining the effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed during the period from the start to the end of the special information game round (jackpot type in the first start opening game round corresponding to special bonus processing a function of setting an effect pattern table for small hits in the second start opening game cycle to be executed during the period of the special bonus processing based on the above).

According to the characteristic X2, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation regarding the type of privilege to be granted after the end of the first special information game round by using the effect executed in the second special information game round.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The determination means has at least two determination modes, a first determination mode (low-probability mode) and a second determination mode (high-probability mode), for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Judgment mode can be executed,
When the determination means is executing the second determination mode, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the determination means is performing the first determination mode, and
The production executing means is
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the determination mode executed by the determination means in the game round executed after the first special information game round ends. Means for determining the effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round based on the type of A function of setting a production pattern table for small wins in the second starting game round to be executed during the period of the special bonus process, depending on whether the jackpot type in the first starting game round is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature X3, the effect executed in the second special information game round is used to determine the determination mode of the game round executed after the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type.

<Characteristic group Y>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round (a first starting opening game round in the second embodiment), which is a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the second special information. means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round (second starting gate game round), which is a game round for notifying the result of determination by the determination means for the information,
The privilege granting means is
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a game round to provide a post-game round privilege as a privilege after the end of the first special information game round. After-end privilege granting means (function for executing the opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment);
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined conditions, a game round in-execution privilege, which is a privilege, is obtained during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. A game-running privilege granting means (function for executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment) to be granted;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic Y1, since the post-game-play-end privilege giving means and the game-play-in-execution privilege-giving means are provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the post-game-play-end privilege and the game-play-in-execution privilege. Further, for example, by setting a case where the privilege is given during game round execution and a case where it is not given, the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is executed during the period during which the game round is executed. Even if there is, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the privilege will be given during the execution of the game cycle, and to give the player a sense of urgency.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The game-running privilege granting means includes:
Triggered by the second special information game round (second starting opening game round) that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round that imparts the privilege during game round execution is executed, the game round is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for giving a middle privilege (a privilege by a round game triggered by a small win in a game for a second starting port).

According to the feature Y2, the privilege during game round execution is granted with the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round is executed, which gives the privilege during game round execution. Even if the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the second special information game round is further executed to give the player a greater sense of expectation. be able to.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
game time setting means for setting a game time, which is the time for a game cycle to be executed by the game cycle execution means, based on the special information;
The upper limit value of the amount of the privilege to be granted as the privilege during execution of the game cycle is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game cycle to which the privilege is granted during execution of the game cycle. (the length of the variation time of the game cycle for the first starting port executed as the special bonus process).

According to the characteristic Y3, the upper limit value of the amount of the privilege to be granted as the privilege during execution of the game cycle is the amount of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game cycle to which the privilege is granted during execution of the game cycle. Since it is determined based on the length, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first special information game cycle should continue for a longer time. In addition, as the end of the first special information game round approaches, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of wanting to obtain as many benefits as possible during the game round and a feeling of impatience regarding the end time of the first special information game round. Intonation can be given to the emotions of

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The production executing means is
Elapsed time information, which is information relating to the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game round to a predetermined timing, is acquired, and based on the elapsed time information, the first target for acquiring the elapsed time information Effect setting processing execution means for executing effect setting processing for setting the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period when the special information game time is executed A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a setting process of a performance pattern for a small win.

According to feature Z1, based on the elapsed time information, which is information about the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game round to a predetermined timing, it is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. Since the effect corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed is set, the player who recognizes the effect corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed is provided with the effect after the first special information game round is executed. and the remaining time until the end of the first special information game round is estimated, and the expectation for the first special information game round is indirectly imparted through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round. can be done.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The production executing means is
means for determining whether or not to execute the effect setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired. game machine.

According to the feature Z2, whether or not to execute the effect setting process is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired. Therefore, based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round is executed, the player receives the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information game round. It is possible to speculate whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and indirectly give a sense of expectation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round. .

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production executing means is
When the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, a predetermined number of times after the first special information game round is started that meets the specific condition. Elapsed time information, which is information relating to the elapsed time until the timing (remaining time RT of the fluctuation time of the first start opening game round), is acquired, and the first special information game round for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired is executed. A gaming machine, comprising means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed during a period in which the second special information game is played.

According to feature Z3, the first special information game round is specified for the player based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. It is possible to speculate whether or not the condition of (1) is satisfied, and to indirectly give a sense of expectation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine according to feature Z3,
Equipped with privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means is
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, post-game bonus awarding means (a function of executing a round game) for awarding a bonus after the game round for informing the result of the determination is completed. )When,
If the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is the specific condition, the game round in-execution privilege granting means for imparting a privilege during the execution of the game round (function for executing special bonus processing) ) and a game machine characterized by comprising.

According to feature Z4, when a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a privilege is given during execution of the game round. It is possible to guess whether or not the first special information game round satisfies a specific condition based on the performance corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the game round is executed. , indirectly through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round, it is possible to impart a greater sense of expectation for a privilege that may be granted during execution of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
determination result notification means for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round for executing the game round when the game operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judging means using symbols is started and then the game operation is ended as one game round. means and
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means upon establishment of a predetermined condition for granting a privilege;
when the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of a small win), a privilege granting means for granting a privilege when a specific condition is established;
The determination result notifying means is
Said second special information corresponding to said second special information game round to be executed during a period in which said first special information game round corresponding to said first special information satisfying said predetermined condition is said to be said When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the pattern corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Despite notifying the result, it corresponds to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed. corresponds to the result of the determination indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition when the determining means determines that the second special information satisfies the specific condition A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing specific condition establishment notification processing for notifying the result of the determination by using the pattern to be determined.

According to feature Z1, a process executed when a pattern corresponding to the result of determination indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and the second special information It is possible to avoid conflict with the process executed when the pattern corresponding to the determination result indicating that the condition of (1) is satisfied is displayed at the same time.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (low-frequency support mode); and
with
The control means is
At the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (high frequency support mode). A game machine characterized by comprising a means for switching to a low frequency support mode.

According to the feature αA2, at the start of the first special information game cycle corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode is provided. The process executed after the start of the first special information game cycle and the control mode of the state transition means can prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start port 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion Acquired information storage means for storing each of the second special information, which is the special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
Display means (liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result;
A gaming machine comprising
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment) that is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information The second identification information (the second liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, respectively, in different display areas of the display means.
The region-specific display means includes:
The first special information game round satisfying the predetermined condition is executed in the first state (the state in which the specific probability variable jackpot has not been won in the previously won first starting opening game round). when the display area displays the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the display area displays the second identification information corresponding to the second special information are exchanged. In spite of not being executed, the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined condition is in the second state (the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round that was previously won state), the display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information are displayed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing a process of exchanging the display area with the display area at a predetermined timing.

According to the feature αB1, even if the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first identification information is recognized by the state in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since the process of exchanging the display area to be displayed and the display area to display the second identification information may or may not be executed, the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition may not be executed. When the execution is executed, by making the player recognize whether or not the exchange of the display areas has been executed, it is possible to determine whether the state in which the first special information game round was executed was the first state or the second state. It is possible to infer what the state was.

[Feature αB2]
In the gaming machine according to feature αB1, the state in which the first special information game cycle is executed in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state. State determination processing execution means for executing state determination processing for determining whether there is
The state determination means is
The first special information is based on the special information corresponding to the pre-execution first special information game round, which is the first special information game round executed prior to the first special information game round satisfying the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing the state determination process by using the game machine.

According to the characteristic αB2, the determination whether the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed is the first state or the second state is performed by the first execution first. Since the processing is performed based on the special information corresponding to one special information game round, for example, in the first special information game round satisfying a predetermined condition, the processing based on the special information corresponding to the preceding first special information game round is performed. , it is possible to perform processing using whether or not it is possible to perform replacement of the display areas. For example, it is possible to suggest information about the special information corresponding to the first special information game round to be executed by executing an effect such as whether or not to replace the display areas.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting a game time, which is the time for a game round to be executed by the game round execution means, based on the special information;
Privilege granting means (function for executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment) that grants a privilege when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
The upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the privilege is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (special bonus processing). The length of the variation time of the game for the first start port executed as a game machine).

According to the feature αC1, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as a privilege is determined based on the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game time of the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition should continue for a longer time. In addition, as the end of the game round approaches, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of wanting to acquire as many benefits as possible, and a feeling of impatience regarding the end time of the relevant game round, thereby imparting intonation to the player's emotions. .

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball into the ball-entering portion. a state transition means for transitioning between a second state which is a state to
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the state transition means is capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the states of the auxiliary means are changed by the state transition means. means and
with
The control means is
When the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the second control mode (low-frequency support mode).

According to the feature αC2, when the privilege granting means grants a privilege, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game cycle corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous due to the privilege given after the start of the game cycle and the control mode of the state transition means.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC2,
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at a predetermined shooting intensity by the shooting means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high-frequency support mode), the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low-frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry portion than in the case where the is controlled.

According to the characteristic αC3, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry portion than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this feature, at the start of a game cycle in which a privilege is awarded by the privilege imparting means, the control mode can be switched from a control mode advantageous to the player to a control mode not excessively advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The game time setting means is
Triggered by the start of the first special information game cycle in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the start of the first start-up game cycle in which a jackpot has been won). The game time setting method for the second special information game round is changed from the first setting method (high-precision high-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process/step S21305 in the second embodiment) to the average value of the game time to be set. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a second setting method different from the first setting method (high-probability-low-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition process/step S21306 in the second embodiment).

According to the feature αD1, when the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is started, the game time setting method of the second special information game round is changed to the first setting. Since the method includes means for switching to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition. After the start, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time can be changed, and the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the player in the game, triggered by the start of the first special information game cycle in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the average value of the game time set by the second setting method is shorter than that by the first setting method.

According to the feature αD2, the second setting method has a shorter average playing time than the first setting method. Compared to before the start, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time after the start can be increased, and an advantageous game state can be achieved. That is, an advantageous game state can be achieved with the start of the first special information game cycle in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition as a trigger.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
The game time setting means is
As a method of setting the game time of the second special information game round, it is possible to select a plurality of types of game time setting methods with different average values of game times to be set,
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game round is set to the first setting. switching from the method to one of the plurality of types of game time setting methods,
The one game time setting method is selected from among a plurality of different game time setting methods having different average values of the game times to be set, and the second corresponding to the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine (the gaming machine according to Modification 18 of the second embodiment), wherein the determination is made based on the special information of No. 1.

According to feature αD3, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game cycle that is switched when the first special information game cycle in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is started is based on the predetermined condition. Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round to be satisfied, the player is expected to feel the expectation that the first special information game round has satisfied the predetermined condition. It is also possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the method of setting the game time of the second special information game cycle which is switched when the first special information game cycle is started.

<Characteristic αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in Modification 1 of the second embodiment) executable by the control means If it is in execution, at the start of the game cycle in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified, the specific control mode being executed is changed from the specific control mode based on the result of the determination. The specific control among the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed by the control means is performed even though the control mode switching determination process, which is a process for determining whether to switch to another type of control mode, is executed. a means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the start of a game cycle in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified when a control mode other than the control mode is being executed. (Gaming machine in modified example 1 of the second embodiment).

According to the feature αE1, when a specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game cycle in which the result of determination by the determination means is notified, based on the result of determination, the specific control mode being executed is changed to the relevant control mode. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is a process for determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, when the specific control mode is being executed by the control means, In addition to giving the player a feeling of expectation about the result of the determination at the start of the game round, it is also possible to give a feeling of expectation whether the control mode will be switched or not.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
The control means is
When the control mode switching determination process is executed and it is determined to switch the control mode,
means for switching the control mode from the specific control mode to a predetermined control mode at the start of a game cycle for informing the result of the determination by the determination means;
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at a predetermined shooting intensity by the shooting means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B in Modification 1 of the second embodiment), the control means controls the predetermined control mode (low-frequency support mode B). A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry section than when the state transition means is controlled in a support mode).

According to the feature αE2, when the control means controls the state transition means in a specific control mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry portion than when the state transition means is controlled in a predetermined control mode. . Therefore, when the control mode is switched by the control means, even if the state of the game shifts to a state advantageous to the player due to the execution of some process, the control mode is changed from the specific control mode to the predetermined control mode. Since the control mode is switched to the control mode of , it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The control means is
In the control mode switching determination process, when the special information subject to the determination satisfies a predetermined condition as a result of the determination by the determination means, it is determined to switch the control mode. machine.

According to the feature αE3, it is determined that the control mode is switched when the special information to be determined satisfies a predetermined condition as a result of the determination by the determination means. , it is possible to recognize that the special information to be determined satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation by switching the control mode.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is the first state (the electric accessory 44a is closed state), and a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that allows or facilitates the entry of a game ball into the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion. a state transition means for transitioning between
Control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The game time setting means is
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in Modification 1 of the second embodiment) executable by the control means If the game is being executed, at the start of the first special information game cycle for notifying the result of the determination on the first special information by the determination means, based on the result of the determination on the first special information. whether to switch the setting method of the game time of the second special information game round from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method; In spite of executing the setting method switching determination process for determining whether means for not executing the setting method switching determination process at the start of the first special information game cycle for informing the result of the determination for the first special information by the determination means. (Gaming machine in modified example 1 of the second embodiment).

When the setting method of the game time of the second special information game round is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, The number of execution times of the second special information game can be changed, and the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed.

Therefore, according to the feature αF1, when the control means is executing a specific control mode among a plurality of types of control modes that can be executed, the determination result of the first special information by the determination means is notified. At the start of the first special information game round, the game time setting method for the second special information game round is changed from the first setting method based on the result of determination for the first special information. Since a setting method switching determination process for determining whether to switch to a second setting method having an average value different from the first setting method is executed, the game recognizes that the control means is executing a specific control mode. Players are expected to change the setting method of the game time of the second special information game round at the start of the first special information game round, that is, whether the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game will be changed. It can give a sense of urgency and urgency.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the average value of the game time set by the second setting method is shorter than that by the first setting method.

According to the feature αF2, the average value of the game time set by the second setting method is shorter than that by the first setting method. to the second setting method, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time can be increased, and the state can be shifted to an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the control means is executing a specific control mode, at the start of the first special information game round, the game time setting method for the second special information game round is the first. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting method will be switched to the second setting method and the state will be changed to an advantageous state.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
The control means is
When the control means is executing a specific control mode among the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed, the result of the determination is displayed at the start of the game cycle in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified. Based on this, despite executing a control mode switching determination process, which is a process for determining whether to switch from the specific control mode being executed to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode , when the control means is executing a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed, a game cycle for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means A gaming machine comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the time of start.

According to the feature αF3, when the specific control mode is being executed, at the start of the game cycle in which the result of the judgment by the judgment means is notified, based on the result of the judgment, the specific control mode being executed is changed to the relevant control mode. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is a process for determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, the player can see that the specific control mode is being executed by the control means. In this case, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation about the result of the determination at the start of the game cycle, and also to give a feeling of anticipation whether the control mode will be switched or not.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
Assisting means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are used as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (low-frequency support mode); and
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
At the time when the first control mode is switched to the second control mode (when the high-frequency support mode flag is switched from ON to OFF), the auxiliary means starts state transition in the second control mode. In a control mode transition period (support mode transition period in Modification 19 of the second embodiment), which is a period up to a point in time, the auxiliary means can be controlled in a plurality of types of operation modes. Gaming machine in modified example 19 of the second embodiment).

According to the characteristic αG1, during the control mode transition period, by controlling the auxiliary means in a plurality of types of operation modes, the player is made to make various guesses when switching from the first control mode to the second control mode. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and to increase the interest in the game. For example, during the control mode transition period, by controlling the auxiliary means in an operation mode different from the operation mode in the first control mode or the second control mode, the player may be temporarily confused, unexpectedly You can give it character.

[Feature αG2]
A gaming machine according to feature αG1,
The control means is
means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in a first operation mode, which is an operation mode when the execution of the first control mode is continued;
and means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in an operation mode different from the first operation mode.

According to the feature αG2, the means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in the first operation mode, which is the operation mode when the execution of the first control mode is continued, is provided. It is possible to delay the player's recognition that the control mode has been switched to the second control mode, overturn the player's guess, or give the player unexpectedness. Further, since means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in an operation mode different from the first operation mode is provided, the control unit changes the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. There are various ways to improve interest, such as making the player aware that the control mode has switched at the switching timing, and making it difficult for the player to temporarily recognize what state the game has transitioned to. can be controlled. Furthermore, by using these means in combination, it is possible to impart various emotions to the player during the control mode transition period, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

<Characteristic αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
determination result notification means for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round for executing the game round when the game operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judging means using symbols is started and then the game operation is ended as one game round. means and
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a third ball-entering part which is a ball-entering part into which a shot game ball can enter, and which facilitates ball-entering when a predetermined accessory is actuated;
a role product control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined role product (the variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b);
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The role item control means is
Predetermined condition actuating means for activating the predetermined accessory (variable prize winning device 36 and opening/closing door 36b of the second embodiment) when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is won); and the predetermined condition. a specific condition actuating means for activating the predetermined accessory (variable prize winning device 36, open/close door 36b of the second embodiment) when a specific condition different from the above is satisfied (when a small win is won) ,
The privilege granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), the predetermined condition operating means is caused to operate the predetermined accessory at the end of the game round. provided with privilege granting means when a predetermined condition is met for granting a privilege by
The game round execution means is
Said second special information corresponding to said second special information game round to be executed during a period in which said first special information game round corresponding to said first special information satisfying said predetermined condition is said to be said In the case of the first specific condition as the specific condition (when the first small win in Modification 12 of the second embodiment is won), the second condition that satisfies the first specific condition. means for terminating the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round corresponding to the special information;
Said second special information corresponding to said second special information game round to be executed during a period in which said first special information game round corresponding to said first special information satisfying said predetermined condition is said to be said In the case of a second specific condition as the specific condition (when the second small win is won in Modification 12 of the second embodiment), the second specific condition that satisfies the second specific condition. means for not ending the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition when the second special information game round corresponding to the special information ends. A gaming machine (a gaming machine according to Modification 12 of the second embodiment).

According to the feature αH1, if the special information corresponding to the second special information game round satisfies the first specific condition, the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round. Therefore, if the second special information game round is executed while the first special information game round is being executed, the second special information game round is terminated. Even if the second special information corresponding to the specified condition satisfies the specified condition, the player is made to guess whether the specified condition satisfies the first specified condition or the second specified condition. , it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
The determination result notifying means is
Said second special information corresponding to said second special information game round to be executed during a period in which said first special information game round corresponding to said first special information satisfying said predetermined condition is said to be said When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the pattern corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Despite notifying the result, it corresponds to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed. corresponds to the result of the determination indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition when the determination means determines that the second special information satisfies the specific condition A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition establishment notification process for notifying the result of the determination by using the pattern to be determined.

According to the feature αH2, the process executed when the symbol corresponding to the result of determination indicating that the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is displayed, and the second special information It is possible to avoid conflict with the process executed when the pattern corresponding to the determination result indicating that the condition of (1) is satisfied is displayed at the same time.

The inventions of the features U to αH solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the above feature group A to feature αH may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature described above can be applied or to which each feature is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part; and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means. machine.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball launch button 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General winning opening 33...First starting opening 44...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a...Electric accessory 44a...Electric accessory 34b...Electric accessory Object drive unit 44b...Electric accessory drive unit 35...Through gate 36...Variable prize winning device 36a...Big prize winning opening 36b...Open/close door 36c...Variable prize winning drive unit 37... Special figure unit 37a... First symbol display part 37b... Second symbol display part 37c... First reservation display part 37d... Second reservation display part 38... General figure unit 39... Round display section 40... Variable display unit 41... Pattern display device 42... Nail 43... Out port 44b... Electric accessory drive unit 45... Main display unit 46... Speaker 47 ...Various lamps 48a...Open/close door 48b...Open/close door drive unit 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 62...Main side MPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball launching mechanism 85... Power supply device 86... Power failure monitoring circuit 90... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
94...Sound and light side RAM
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107... Video RAM
Sync1... First synchronous display area Sync2... Second synchronous display area PA... Game area MA... Main display area Ra... First reservation area Rb... Second reservation area Ds1.. .First reservation display area Ds2...Second reservation display area RaN...First start reservation number RbN...Second start reservation number

Claims (3)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended;
a game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time to be executed by the game time execution means is set as the game time;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a first ball-entering section which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
a second ball-entering section, which is a ball-entering section into which the launched game ball can enter;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means is
Means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering portion, and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion and
The acquired information storage means is
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the second special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the second ball entering portion means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round, which is a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the first special information, and a game round for informing the result of judgment by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing in parallel with a second special information game round, which is a game round,
The game time setting means is
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game time of the second special information game round is set as a first setting method. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching from the second setting method to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the average value of the game time set by the second setting method is shorter than that by the first setting method. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The game time setting means is
As a method of setting the game time of the second special information game round, it is possible to select a plurality of types of game time setting methods with different average values of game times to be set,
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game round is set to the first setting. switching from the method to one of the plurality of types of game time setting methods,
The one game time setting method is selected from among a plurality of different game time setting methods having different average values of the game times to be set, and the second corresponding to the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by being determined based on 1 special information.

Images